&EJUJPO 

$0/'*(63"5*0/
."/6"-

4*.05*$4
.
1)
NBJO
NPUPST

XXXTJFNFOTDPNESJWFT
 Introduction 1
Fundamental safety
instructions 2

Motor description 3
SIMOTICS M
Mechanical properties 4
Drive technology
1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors Motor components and
options 5

Configuration 6
Configuration Manual
Technical data and
characteristics 7

Preparing for use 8

Electrical connection 9

Dimension drawings 10

Appendix A

09/2024
A5E51895839B AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance
are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient
conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. The remaining trademarks in
this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of
the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E51895839B AB Copyright © Siemens 2010 - 2024.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 09/2024 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 About SIMOTICS................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 About this manual ............................................................................................................... 7
1.2.1 Content ............................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.2 Target group ........................................................................................................................ 8
1.2.3 Standard scope .................................................................................................................... 8
1.2.4 Use of third-party products in this documentation ................................................................ 8
1.2.5 Websites of third-party companies........................................................................................ 8
1.3 SIMOTICS documentation .................................................................................................... 9
1.4 Documentation in the Internet ........................................................................................... 10
1.5 Service and support ........................................................................................................... 10
1.5.1 ID link and Siemens Online Support.................................................................................... 10
1.5.2 Siemens Industry Online Support on the road..................................................................... 11
1.5.3 Feedback on the technical documentation ......................................................................... 12
1.5.4 mySupport documentation ................................................................................................ 12
1.5.5 Technical support............................................................................................................... 13
1.5.6 Training ............................................................................................................................. 14
1.5.7 Spare parts services ........................................................................................................... 14
1.6 Important product information .......................................................................................... 14
2 Fundamental safety instructions......................................................................................................... 17
2.1 General safety instructions ................................................................................................ 17
2.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge ..................................... 22
2.3 Cybersecurity information .................................................................................................. 22
2.4 Residual risks of power drive systems ................................................................................. 24
3 Motor description ................................................................................................................................ 27
3.1 Highlights and benefits ...................................................................................................... 27
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions ...................................................... 28
3.2.1 Directives and standards .................................................................................................... 28
3.2.2 Technical features .............................................................................................................. 32
3.2.3 Classifying environmental conditions according to climate classes ...................................... 35
3.3 Derating factors ................................................................................................................. 36
3.3.1 Reduction of the max. DC-link voltage ................................................................................ 37
3.4 Selection and ordering data ............................................................................................... 37
3.4.1 Article No. suffixes for shaft height 80 to 160 ..................................................................... 39
3.4.2 Article No. suffixes for SH 80 Premium Performance ........................................................... 42
3.4.3 Article No. supplements for SH 132 and 160, synchronous-reluctance ................................ 44
3.4.4 Article No. suffixes for SH 180 to 280 ................................................................................. 46
3.4.5 Article No. suffixes for SH 280 ............................................................................................ 49

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 3
Table of contents

3.4.6 Article No. supplement for shaft height 80 to 160 + holding brake DE................................. 52
3.4.7 Article No. supplement for SH 132 and 160, synchronous-reluctance + holding brake ......... 55
3.4.8 Article No. supplements for SH 180 to 225 + holding brake ................................................ 57
3.4.9 Options ............................................................................................................................. 58
3.5 Rating plate data................................................................................................................ 65
4 Mechanical properties ......................................................................................................................... 69
4.1 Cooling.............................................................................................................................. 69
4.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 69
4.1.2 Forced ventilation .............................................................................................................. 69
4.1.3 Water cooling .................................................................................................................... 73
4.2 Degree of protection .......................................................................................................... 85
4.3 Construction types............................................................................................................. 87
4.4 Types of bearing ................................................................................................................ 88
4.4.1 Drive output types and bearing versions ............................................................................. 88
4.4.2 Bearing lifetime ................................................................................................................. 93
4.4.3 NDE bearing with insulated shaft (option L27).................................................................... 96
4.5 Shaft end........................................................................................................................... 98
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors................................................. 98
4.6.1 Rotor-supported rotating union ........................................................................................ 101
4.6.2 Bearingless, frame-supported rotating union ................................................................... 105
4.6.3 Mounting information and instructions ............................................................................ 109
4.6.4 Suggestion for an adapter for bearingless, frame-supported rotating unions ..................... 112
4.7 Radial and axial forces...................................................................................................... 113
4.7.1 Radial force...................................................................................................................... 113
4.7.2 Axial force ....................................................................................................................... 115
4.7.3 Permissible radial and axial forces for 1PH808 Premium Performance................................ 117
4.7.4 Radial and axial force diagrams ........................................................................................ 117
4.8 Radial eccentricity, concentricity and axial eccentricity...................................................... 140
4.9 Balancing......................................................................................................................... 142
4.9.1 Requirements .................................................................................................................. 142
4.9.2 Balancing 1PH8 motors with "Premium Performance" bearing version ............................... 143
4.10 Vibration response........................................................................................................... 148
4.10.1 Mounting and mounting instructions ............................................................................... 148
4.10.2 Natural frequency when mounted.................................................................................... 150
4.10.3 Misalignment................................................................................................................... 151
4.10.4 Flywheels ........................................................................................................................ 153
4.10.5 Vibration stressing ........................................................................................................... 153
4.11 Vibration severity grade ................................................................................................... 156
4.12 Noise emission................................................................................................................. 157
5 Motor components and options ........................................................................................................ 159
5.1 Motor components .......................................................................................................... 159
5.1.1 Thermal motor protection ................................................................................................ 159
5.1.2 Encoder ........................................................................................................................... 160
5.1.2.1 Encoder overview ............................................................................................................ 160

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

4 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Table of contents

5.1.2.2 Encoder connection for motors with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface.............................................. 161

5.1.2.3 Encoder connection for motors without DRIVE-CLiQ (12/17-pole)...................................... 162
5.1.2.4 Encoder assignment as a function of maximum permissible speeds .................................. 162
5.1.2.5 Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R or HTL 2048 S/R.......................................................... 165
5.1.2.6 Incremental encoders IC 2048 S/R, IN 512 S/R and IN 256 S/R............................................ 167
5.1.2.7 Absolute encoder AM 2048 S/R ........................................................................................ 170
5.2 Options ........................................................................................................................... 171
5.2.1 Overview of options......................................................................................................... 171
5.2.2 Sealing air connection (option Q12) ................................................................................. 171
5.2.3 Protection against explosion (options M03 and M39)........................................................ 173
5.2.4 Increased resistance to vibration (option L03)................................................................... 180
5.2.5 Holding brake (option) ..................................................................................................... 182
5.2.5.1 Properties ........................................................................................................................ 182
5.2.5.2 Mounted holding brake for SH 80 to SH 160 ..................................................................... 186
5.2.5.3 Mounted holding brake for SH 180 and SH 225 ................................................................ 196
5.2.6 Anti-condensation heating (option K45)........................................................................... 200
5.2.7 Condensation drain hole (option L12) .............................................................................. 200
5.2.8 Higher number of grounding terminals in the terminal box (Q00) ..................................... 202
5.2.9 Chain of PTC thermistors for alarm and trip (option A12) .................................................. 202
6 Configuration..................................................................................................................................... 205
6.1 Configuring software ....................................................................................................... 205
6.1.1 TST engineering tool (TIA-Selection-Tool) ......................................................................... 205
6.2 Procedure when engineering ........................................................................................... 206
6.2.1 SINAMICS configuring procedure ...................................................................................... 206
6.2.2 Specifying the duty cycle.................................................................................................. 208
6.2.3 Selecting induction motors .............................................................................................. 211
6.2.4 Selecting synchronous motors.......................................................................................... 212
6.2.5 Selecting synchronous-reluctance motors......................................................................... 213
6.3 Different rated points for induction motors ....................................................................... 214
6.4 Configuration for SINAMICS G .......................................................................................... 217
6.5 Configuration for 1PH808 Premium Performance.............................................................. 218
7 Technical data and characteristics..................................................................................................... 221
8 Preparing for use ............................................................................................................................... 223
9 Electrical connection ......................................................................................................................... 225
9.1 Permissible line system configurations.............................................................................. 225
9.2 Circuit diagram of the motor ............................................................................................ 225
9.3 System integration........................................................................................................... 226
9.3.1 SINAMICS drive I/O........................................................................................................... 226
9.3.2 Connecting-up information .............................................................................................. 227
9.3.3 Routing cables in a damp environment............................................................................. 229
9.3.4 Power connection ............................................................................................................ 230
9.3.5 External fan ..................................................................................................................... 245
9.3.6 Signal connection ............................................................................................................ 255
10 Dimension drawings .......................................................................................................................... 259
10.1 SIEMENS Product Configurator ......................................................................................... 259

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 5
Table of contents

A Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 261
A.1 Description of terms......................................................................................................... 261
A.2 Environmental compatibility ............................................................................................ 263

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

6 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Introduction 1
1.1 About SIMOTICS

Description
SIMOTICS is the Siemens family of electric motors addressing the complete motor spectrum in
Digital Industry.

1.2 About this manual

1.2.1 Content

Description
This Configuration Manual supports you when selecting motors for your application. The
Configuration Manual refers to rules and guidelines for configuring motors.
To illustrate possible application areas for our products, typical use cases are listed in this product
documentation and in the online help. These are purely exemplary and do not constitute a
statement on the suitability of the respective product for applications in specific individual cases.
Unless explicitly contractually agreed, Siemens assumes no liability for such suitability.
Suitability for a particular application in specific individual cases must be assessed by the user,
taking into account all technical, legal, and other requirements on a case-by-case basis. Always
observe the descriptions of the technical properties and the relevant constraints of the
respective product contained in the product documentation.
This documentation should be kept in a location where it can be easily accessed and made
available to the personnel responsible.

Information regarding third-party products

Note
Recommendation relating to third-party products
This document contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens accepts the
fundamental suitability of these third-party products.
You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third-party products.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 7
Introduction
1.2 About this manual

1.2.2 Target group

Description
This Configuration Manual addresses:
• Planning engineers
• Design engineers
• Mechanical design engineers

1.2.3 Standard scope

The functions of the system as delivered can only be found in the order documents.
Further functions may be executable in the system, which are not explained in this
documentation. However, there is no entitlement to these functions in the case of a new
delivery or service.
This documentation does not contain all detailed information on all types of the product.
Furthermore, this documentation cannot take into consideration every conceivable type of
installation, operation and service/maintenance.
The machine manufacturer must document any additions or modifications they make to the
product themselves.

1.2.4 Use of third-party products in this documentation

This documentation contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens
accepts the fundamental suitability of these third-party products. You can use equivalent
products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the use of third-party products.

1.2.5 Websites of third-party companies

This document may contain hyperlinks to third-party websites. Siemens is not responsible for
and shall not be liable for these websites and their content. Siemens has no control over the
information which appears on these websites and is not responsible for the content and
information provided there. The user bears the risk for their use.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

8 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Introduction
1.3 SIMOTICS documentation

1.3 SIMOTICS documentation

Description
Comprehensive documentation on SIMOTICS and the SINAMICS converter family is provided on
the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/13204/man).
You can display documents or download them in PDF and HTML5 format.
The documentation is divided into the following categories:

Table 1-1 SIMOTICS / SINAMICS documentation

Information Documentation Content Target group

class1)
General information Configuration Man‐ Rules, guidelines, and tools for config‐ Planners, configuration engineers
ual uring products, systems, and plants.
Also contains information on the oper‐
ating and ambient conditions for hard‐
ware and software, the use of func‐
tions, as well as on circuit diagrams
and terminal diagrams and the instal‐
lation of software insofar as this is nec‐
essary for commissioning.
Device information Installation Instruc‐ All relevant information on setting up, Installation personnel, commissioning
tions installing and cabling, as well as the engineers, service and maintenance
required dimensional drawings and cir‐ personnel
cuit diagrams
Basic information Operating instruc‐ Comprehensive collection of all infor‐ Machine operators, plant operators
tions mation necessary for the safe opera‐
tion of products, plant/system parts
and complete plants (IEC 82079)
Compact instruc‐ Essential contents of the operating in‐ Machine operators, plant operators
tions structions in a reduced and condensed
form
Product Information Information that only becomes known Planners, configuration engineers,
shortly before or even after start of de‐ technologists, installation personnel,
livery and is therefore not included in constructors; commissioning engi‐
the associated user documentation neers, machine operators, program‐
mers, service and maintenance per‐
sonnel
Online help Instructions for configuring, program‐ Configuration engineers, program‐
ming, and commissioning mers, commissioning engineers
1)
Not all documentation classes are available for every SIMOTICS / SINAMICS product.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 9
Introduction
1.5 Service and support

1.4 Documentation in the Internet

The manuals for the motors, gearboxes and geared motors are available here: SI web page
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109813641)

1.5 Service and support

1.5.1 ID link and Siemens Online Support

You can find additional information about the product:
• via ID link
• using the Siemens Industry Online Support
– Website: SIOS
– App Industry Online Support (for Apple iOS and Android)

Product-specific information via ID link

The QR code on your product and on the product packaging contains the ID link.
ID link is a globally unique identifier according to IEC 61406-1.
You can use the ID link to access product data, manuals, Declarations of Conformity,
certificates and other information about your product.

*%
-JOL

Figure 1-1 QR code with ID link included

The ID link is characterized by a frame with a black corner at the bottom right.

Content of Siemens Online Support

• Product support
• Global forum for information and best practice sharing between users and specialists
• Local contact persons via the contact person database (→ Contact)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

10 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Introduction
1.5 Service and support

• Product information
• FAQs (frequently asked questions)
• Application examples
• Manuals
• Downloads
• Compatibility tool
• Newsletter with product selection
• Catalogs/brochures
• Certificates

See also
SIOS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)

1.5.2 Siemens Industry Online Support on the road

Description

Figure 1-2 "Siemens Industry Online Support" app

The "Industry Online Support" app supports you in the following areas, for example:
• Resolving problems when executing a project
• Troubleshooting when faults develop
• Expanding a system or planning a new system
Furthermore, you have access to the Technical Forum and other articles that our experts have
drawn up:
• FAQs
• Application examples
• Manuals

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 11
Introduction
1.5 Service and support

• Certificates
• Product announcements and much more
There is a data matrix code or QR code on the nameplate of your product. Scan the code
using the "Industry Online Support" app to obtain technical information about the device.
The app is available for Apple iOS and Android.

See also
App (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/2067)

1.5.3 Feedback on the technical documentation

Description
We welcome your questions, suggestions, and corrections for this technical documentation.
Please use the "Provide feedback" link at the end of the entries in Siemens Industry Online
Support.

Figure 1-3 Requests and feedback

1.5.4 mySupport documentation

Description
With the "mySupport documentation" web-based system, you can compile your own individual
documentation based on Siemens content and adapt this for your own machine documentation.
To start the application, click the "My Documentation" tile on the mySupport homepage
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/my):

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

12 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Introduction
1.5 Service and support

Figure 1-4 mySupport

The configured manual can be exported in the PDF or XML format.

Siemens content that supports the mySupport documentation can be identified by the
"Configure" link.

1.5.5 Technical support

Description
Your routes to technical support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/4868):
• Support Request (https://www.siemens.com/SupportRequest)
• Contact person database (https://www.automation.siemens.com/aspa_app)
• "Industry Online Support" mobile app
The Support Request is the most important input channel for questions relating to products
from Siemens Industry. This will assign your request a unique ticket number for tracking
purposes. The Support Request offers you:
• Direct access to technical experts
• Recommended solutions for various questions (e.g. FAQs)
• Status tracking of your requests
Technical support also assists you in some cases via remote support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/106665159) to resolve your requests. A
Support representative will assist you in diagnosing or resolving the problem through screen
transfer.
More information on the Support service packages is available on the Internet via the
following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/4869).

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 13
Introduction
1.6 Important product information

1.5.6 Training

Description
SITRAIN – Digital Industry Academy offers a comprehensive range of training courses on
Siemens industrial products – directly from the manufacturer, for all industries and use cases, for
all knowledge levels from beginner to expert.
More information can be found on the Internet via the following address (https://
www.siemens.com/sitrain).

1.5.7 Spare parts services

The online spare part service "Spares on Web" offers spare parts for the product.

See also
Spares on Web (https://www.sow.siemens.com)

1.6 Important product information

The 1PH8 three-phase motors are used as industrial drives for machine tools and production
machines.
Based on seamless technology, 1PH8 motors can be used in conjunction with the
SINAMICS S120 or G120 drive system (version PM 240) in a wide range of applications:
• Compact machine tools
• Complex machining centers and lathes
• Milling machines with full enclosure
• Milling spindles subject to high loads
• Counterspindles or power tools for turning machines
• Direct power tools with internal cooling
• Main drives in presses and extruders, converting applications
• Rotary axes in the paper and printing industry
• For use in crane systems (power house)
• Flying shears, coilers and winder drives
• Customized machines

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

14 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Introduction
1.6 Important product information

WARNING
Danger to life and material damage when incorrectly used
If you do not use the motors or their components correctly, there is a risk of death, severe injury
and/or material damage.
• Only use the motors for industrial or commercial plants and systems.
• If, in an exceptional case, you do not use the motors in industrial or commercial plants and
systems, ensure that increased requirements are complied with (e.g. regarding touch
protection).
• Do not use the motors in hazardous areas (where there is a risk of explosion), if the motors
have not been expressly released and authorized for these types of applications. Comply
with the separately added supplementary notes.
• Only use the motors and their components for the applications specified by Siemens.
• Protect the motors against dirt and contact with aggressive substances.
• Ensure that the site conditions comply with the rating plate data and the conditions
specified in this documentation. Take into consideration deviations regarding approvals or
country-specific regulations.
• If you have any questions regarding the intended use, please contact your local sales
partner.
• If you wish to use special versions and design variants, whose technical data differ from the
motors described in this document, then first contact your local sales partner.

WARNING
Danger to life for wearers of active implants due to magnetic and electrical fields
Persons with active implants, for example cardiac pacemakers, standing close to the motors
can be negatively affected, which could cause serious damage to their health or even death.
• If you are affected, stay at a minimum distance of 500 mm from the motors (tripping
threshold for static magnetic fields of 0.5 mT according to the Directive 2013/35/EU).

The motors are designed for operation in covered areas under normal climatic conditions, such
as those found in production environments.

See also
Classifying environmental conditions according to climate classes (Page 35)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 15
Introduction
1.6 Important product information

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

16 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Fundamental safety instructions 2
2.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any of
the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence.

WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may carry
a hazardous voltage. Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV- (Protective
Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the electronics
modules.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 17
Fundamental safety instructions
2.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Electric shock due to damaged motors or devices
Improper handling of motors or devices can damage them.
Hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components on damaged
motors or devices.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged motors or devices.

WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the conductors of power cables that are not used
(e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.

WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when touched,
can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Opening a plug connection when a system is in operation can result in arcing that may cause
serious injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.

NOTICE
Property damage due to loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can
result in damage due to fire, device defects or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque.
• Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

18 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Fundamental safety instructions
2.1 General safety instructions

NOTICE
Damage to equipment due to unsuitable tightening tools.
Unsuitable tightening tools or fastening methods can damage the screws of the equipment.
• Only use screw inserts that exactly match the screw head.
• Tighten the screws with the torque specified in the technical documentation.
• Use a torque wrench or a mechanical precision nut runner with a dynamic torque sensor and
speed limitation system.
• Adjust the tools used regularly.

WARNING
Unexpected machine movement caused by radio devices or cellphones
Using radio devices, cellphones, or mobile WLAN devices in the immediate vicinity of the
components can result in equipment malfunction or faults and damage to the devices.
Malfunctions may impair the functional safety of machines and can therefore put people in
danger or lead to property damage.
• Avoid operating radio devices, cellphones and mobile WLAN devices in the direct vicinity of
converters and operating units.
• Scan the machine readable code, e.g. a QR code, from a greater distance or switch off the
converter power supply before scanning.
• Only operate built-in devices with the control cabinet doors closed.
• When control cabinet doors are open, only qualified electrical personnel are allowed to carry
out service and maintenance work.

WARNING
Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels
Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized
dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language.
• Replace illegible warning labels.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 19
Fundamental safety instructions
2.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system, including
all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted and
activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Perform a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.

Note
Important Safety instructions for Safety Integrated
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the Safety instructions in the
Safety Integrated documentation.

WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Electromagnetic fields (EMF) are generated by the operation of electrical power equipment,
such as transformers, converters, or motors. People with pacemakers or implants are at
particular risk in the immediate vicinity of this equipment.
• If this affects you, maintain the minimum distance to such equipment that is specified in the
"Important product information" chapter.

WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to permanent-magnet fields
Even when switched off, electric motors with permanent magnets represent a potential risk for
persons with heart pacemakers or implants if they are close to converters/motors.
• If this affects you, maintain the minimum distance to such equipment that is specified in the
"Important product information" chapter.
• When transporting or storing permanent-magnet motors, always use the original packing
materials.
• Clearly mark the storage locations with the appropriate warning labels.
• IATA regulations must be observed when transported by air.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

20 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Fundamental safety instructions
2.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Injury caused by moving or ejected parts
Contact with moving motor parts or drive output elements and the ejection of loose motor
parts (e.g. feather keys) out of the motor enclosure can result in severe injury or death.
• Remove any loose parts or secure them so that they cannot be flung out.
• Do not touch any moving parts.
• Safeguard all moving parts using the appropriate safety guards.

WARNING
Fire due to incorrect operation of the motor
When incorrectly operated and in the case of a fault, the motor can overheat resulting in fire
and smoke. This can result in severe injury or death. Further, excessively high temperatures
destroy motor components and result in increased failures as well as shorter service lives of
motors.
• Operate the motor according to the relevant specifications.
• Only operate the motors in conjunction with effective temperature monitoring.
• Immediately switch off the motor if excessively high temperatures occur.

CAUTION
Burns and thermal damage caused by hot surfaces
Temperatures above 100 °C may occur on the surfaces of motors, converters, and other drive
components.
Touching hot surfaces may result in burns. Hot surfaces may damage or destroy temperature
sensitive parts.
• Ensure that temperature-sensitive parts do not come into contact with hot surfaces.
• Mount drive components so that they are not accessible during operation.
Measures when maintenance is required:
• Allow drive components to cool off before starting any work.
• Use appropriate personnel protection equipment, e.g. gloves.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 21
Fundamental safety instructions
2.3 Cybersecurity information

2.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic

discharge
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules or
devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.

NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual
components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of aluminum
foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table with
ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).

2.3 Cybersecurity information

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial cybersecurity functions that support
the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
cybersecurity concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a
concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial cybersecurity measures that may be implemented,
please visit
https://www.siemens.com/cybersecurity-industry.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Cybersecurity
RSS Feed under
https://new.siemens.com/cert.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

22 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Fundamental safety instructions
2.3 Cybersecurity information

Further information is provided on the Internet:

Industrial Security Configuration Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/108862708)

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states in
your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a state-of-the-art, integrated
industrial cybersecurity concept for the installation or machine.
• Make sure that you include all installed products in the integrated industrial cybersecurity
concept.
• Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with suitable
protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
• Carefully check all cybersecurity-related settings once commissioning has been completed.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 23
Fundamental safety instructions
2.4 Residual risks of power drive systems

2.4 Residual risks of power drive systems

When assessing the machine or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local
regulations (e.g. EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system integrator must
take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components
of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example,
– Hardware faults and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and
connections
– Response times of the control system and of the drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic components
– External influences/damage
– X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures inside and outside the components, including open flames, as
well as emissions of light, noise, particles, gases, etc. due to fault conditions, e.g.:
– Component failure
– Software errors
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– External influences/damage
– Short circuits or ground faults in the intermediate DC circuit of the converter
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Influence during electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– External influences/damage
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to
people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

24 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Fundamental safety instructions
2.4 Residual risks of power drive systems

6. Influence of network-connected and wireless communications systems, e.g. ripple-control

transmitters or data communication via the network or mobile radio, WLAN or Bluetooth.
7. Motors for use in potentially explosive areas:
When moving components such as bearings become worn, this can cause enclosure
components to exhibit unexpectedly high temperatures during operation, creating a hazard
in areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere.
For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 25
Fundamental safety instructions
2.4 Residual risks of power drive systems

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

26 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Motor description 3
3.1 Highlights and benefits

Overview
The SIMOTICS M-1PH8 motor series, referred to as 1PH8 in the following, is a motor generation
developed for universal implementation in plants and machines with motion control
applications. The motors are based on a flexible, modular principle and are available as
induction, synchronous-reluctance and compact synchronous variants, with either forced
ventilation or water cooling.
In comparison to the freely selectable performance of vector and servo control with
the SINAMICS S120 drive system, it is possible to select between induction, synchronous-
reluctance or synchronous variants in the case of the new SIMOTICS M-1PH8 motor series.
Thanks to this flexible interplay between converter and motor, it is now even easier to
implement applications which involve
• extreme duty cycles,
• short rise times,
• high precision with respect to speed, torque and positioning.

The motors have been designed specifically for use in conjunction with the SINAMICS S120
drive system. Depending on the control requirements, appropriate encoder systems are
available for the motors for sensing the motor speed and indirect position.
Encoder systems for C-axis operation are also available for machine tools.
1PH8 motors are available in two different cooling types:
• Forced ventilation
• Water cooling

SH 80 to SH 160 SH 80 to SH 160 SH 180 to SH 280

Forced ventilation Water cooling Water cooling

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 27
Motor description
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

SH 180 to SH 225 SH 280

Forced ventilation Forced ventilation

Highlights and benefits

• Wide power spectrum with low envelope dimensions
• Wide speed control ranges
• High degree of flexibility due to the choice of
– Induction, synchronous-reluctance or synchronous version
– Forced ventilation or water cooling
– Solid or hollow shaft
– Various bearing concepts
– Different encoder types for speed control and precision positioning
• Outstanding performance characteristics
– Maximum speeds up to 24,000 r/min
– Minimal torque oscillations up to 10 µm
– Excellent vibration magnitudes
– High dynamic response (short ramp-up times)
• Low noise emission
• Simple and flexible connection system
• Commissioning with electronic type plate and DRIVE-CLiQ interface

3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

3.2.1 Directives and standards

The chapter lists the standards and directives that are applicable for the motor and which the
motor complies with.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

28 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

Standards that are complied with

Note
The standards listed in this manual are not dated.
You can take the currently relevant and valid dates from the Declaration of Conformity.

The motors of the type series SIMOTICS S, SIMOTICS M, SIMOTICS L, SIMOTICS T, SIMOTICS A,
called "SIMOTICS motor series" below, fulfill the requirements of the following directives and
standards:
• EN 60034‑1 - Rotating electrical machines – Dimensioning and operating behavior
• EN 60204‑1 - Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines; general requirements
Where applicable, the SIMOTICS motor series are in conformance with the following parts of
EN 60034:

Feature Standard
Degree of protection EN 60034‑5
Cooling 1)
EN 60034‑6
Type of construction EN 60034‑7
Connection designations EN 60034‑8
Noise levels 1) EN 60034‑9
Temperature monitoring EN 60034‑11
Vibration severity grades 1)
EN 60034‑14
1)
Standard part, e.g. cannot be used for built-in motors.

Relevant directives
The following directives are relevant for SIMOTICS motors.

European Low-Voltage Directive

SIMOTICS motors comply with the Low-Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.

European Machinery Directive

SIMOTICS motors do not fall within the scope covered by the Machinery Directive.
However, the use of the products in a typical machine application has been fully assessed for
compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health and safety.

European EMC Directive

SIMOTICS motors do not fall within the scope covered by the EMC Directive. The products
are not considered as devices in the sense of the directive. Installed and operated with
a converter, the motor - together with the Power Drive System - must comply with the
requirements laid down in the applicable EMC Directive.

European RoHS Directive

The SIMOTICS motor series complies with the Directive 2011/65/EU regarding limiting the use
of certain hazardous substances.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 29
Motor description
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

European Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

SIMOTICS motors comply with the 2012/19/EU directive on taking back and recycling waste
electrical and electronic equipment.

European Directive 2005/32/EC defining requirements for environmentally friendly

design of electric motors
The SIMOTICS motor series is not subject to Regulation (EC) No. 640/2009 for
implementation of this directive.

European Directive 2009/125/EC defining ecodesign requirements of electric motors

and speed controls
The SIMOTICS motor series is not subject to (EU) Regulation 2019/1781 for implementation
of this directive.

Eurasian conformity
SIMOTICS motors comply with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/Kazakhstan (EAC)
customs union.

China Compulsory Certification

SIMOTICS motors do not fall within the scope covered by the China Compulsory Certification
(CCC).
CCC negative certification (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/93013317)

Underwriters Laboratories
SIMOTICS motors are generally in compliance with UL and cUL as components of motor
applications, and are appropriately listed.
Specifically developed motors and functions are the exceptions in this case. Here, it is crucial
that you carefully observe the content of the quotation and that there is a UL or cUL mark on
the rating plate!

Quality systems
Siemens employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001
and ISO 14001.
Certificates for SIMOTICS motors can be downloaded from the Internet at the following link:
Certificates for SIMOTICS motors (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/13347/
cert)

China RoHS
SIMOTICS motors comply with the China RoHS.
You can find more information at:
China RoHS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/109738670/en)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

30 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

China Energy Label

Name of the standard Minimum allowable values for energy efficiency and energy efficiency class of perma‐
nent-magnet synchronous motors (GB30253).
Date of entry into force July 1, 2020
Affected motors Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (without integrated brake) with a rated pow‐
er of 0.55 kW to 90 kW and a rated speed of 500 r/min to 3000 r/min controlled from
a converter with variable frequency on a line supply less than 1000 V.
Motor requirements As of the implementation date of the guideline, all motors involved must have the
"China Energy Label".
Affected Siemens products The SIEMENS motors involved are subject to the requirements of Guideline GB30253.

Examples of the "China Energy Label" and the motor rating plate:

China Energy Label

Figure 3-1 ① Article number (diagram showing a typical 1PH8)

Motor rating plate
The specified "1PH8184-2DD0" motor only serves as representative of the 1PH8 motor list.
This explanation is provided to the left of the Chinese title (specified for Chinese custom
authorities).

Figure 3-2 ② Article number of the basic motor type (example for a 1PH8)
The permissible motor list can then be called using button ③ at the bottom right.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 31
Motor description
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

The QR code on the China Energy Label includes a link to the listed motor folder.
Example: By clicking on the link http://elmm.bbqk.com/index.html?a=hb6zs (https://
ela.bbqk.com/index.html?uid=hb6zs), a folder opens with all of the listed 1PH8 motors, shaft
heights 180 and 225.

Note
The article number ① stated on the China Energy Label corresponds to the article number of the
basic motor type ② (boldface type) in the motor article number.

UKCA - United Kingdom Conformity Assessed

The SIMOTICS motor series satisfies the conformity requirements for England, Wales and
Scotland.

3.2.2 Technical features

The technical features specified in the tables below refer to basic 1PH8 motors and are applicable
for induction, synchronous-reluctance and synchronous variants.
Depending on the electrical and mechanical configuration, it is possible to add options to the
basic model in order to adapt it to a specific drive application (refer to Options, Selection and
Ordering data).

Table 3-1 Forced ventilation

Insulation of the stator winding For an ambient air temperature up to 40 °C

in accordance with EN 60034–1 (IEC 60034–1) Shaft heights 80 ... 280 temperature class 180 (H)
Cooling Forced ventilation
in accordance with EN 60034-6 (IEC 60034-6) Shaft heights 80 ... 225: Fan mounted axially at NDE
SH 280: Fan mounted radially at NDE
Temperature monitoring Temperature sensor in the stator winding
Shaft heights 180 ... 280: Additional temperature sensor as a standby
Fan supply voltage Shaft height 80: 1 AC 230 V 50/60 Hz, 1 AC 265 V 60 Hz
(See Chapter "Technical data") Shaft heights 100 ... 3 AC 400 V, 50/60 Hz, 3 AC 480 V 60 Hz
160: 1 AC 200 V ... 277 V, 50/60 Hz (EC fan)
Shaft heights 180 ... 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V, 50/60 Hz (EC fan)
225:
Shaft height 280:
Type Shaft height 80: IM B3, IM B5
in accordance with EN 60034-7 (IEC 60034-7) Shaft heights 100 ... IM B3, IM B5, IM B35
280:
Degree of protection Shaft heights 80 ... IP55
in accordance with EN 60034-5 (IEC 60034-5) 280: IP23
Shaft heights 180 ...
280:
Shaft extension at the drive Plain shaft or feather key
end (DE) in accordance with DIN 748-3 (IEC For feather key, full-key or half-key balancing
60072-1)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

32 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

Shaft and flange accuracy Shaft heights 80 ... 160: Tolerance R (reduced), SPECIAL2)
in accordance with DIN 42955 (IEC 60072-1)1) Shaft height 180 ... Tolerance N (normal)
280:
Vibration magnitudes Shaft heights 80 ... 160: Level R/A, SPECIAL/B
in accordance with Siemens / EN 60034-14 (IEC Shaft height 180 ... Level A
60034-14) 280:
Sound pressure level Shaft heights 80 ... 132: 70 dB at a rated pulse frequency of 4 kHz and a
in accordance with DIN EN ISO 1680, max. speed range up to 5000 r/min
tolerance +3 dB, external fan 50 Hz Shaft height 160: 73 dB at a rated pulse frequency of 4 kHz and a
speed range up to 5000 r/min
Shaft heights 180 and 73 dB at a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz and a
225: speed range:
Forced ventilation (IP55)
• Shaft height 180 to 5000 r/min
• Shaft height 225 to 3500 r/min
Open-circuit ventilation (IP23)
• Shaft height 180 to 3000 r/min
• Shaft height 225 to 2000 r/min
Shaft height 280 74 dB at a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz and a
speed range: up to 3300 r/min
Forced ventilation (IP55)
• Shaft height 280 to 3300 r/min
Open-circuit ventilation (IP23)
• Shaft height 280 to 2800 r/min
Bearing versions and maximum speeds See Chapter "Mechanical properties of the motors"
Encoder systems, built-in • Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (AM2048 S/R encoder)
without • Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 2048 S/R with C and D tracks (en‐
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
coder IC2048S/R)
• Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 512 S/R without C and D tracks
(encoder IN512S/R)
• Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 256 S/R without C and D track
(encoder IN256S/R)
• Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder HTL1024 S/R)
• Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder HTL2048 S/R)
Encoder systems, built-in • Absolute encoder 22 bit singleturn + 12 bit multiturn (encoder
with AM22DQ)
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
• Incremental encoder 22 bit with commutation position (encoder
IC22DQ)
• Incremental encoder 20 bit without commutation position (encoder
IN20DQ)
• Incremental encoder 19 bit without commutation position (encoder
IN19DQ)
Connection Connector for signals or DRIVE-CLiQ interface
(mating connector is not included in the scope of supply)
Shaft heights 80 ...132: Terminal box NDE top/power connector
Shaft heights 160 ... 225: Terminal box NDE top
Shaft height 280: Terminal box NDE right

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 33
Motor description
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

Rating plate (adhesive label) 1x glued on the motor

1x supplied loose in the terminal box
Paint finish Standard paint finish anthracite RAL 7016
Options See Options and Selection and Ordering data
Approvals, in accordance with cURus

1) Radial eccentricity of the shaft end, coaxiality of the centering wheel and axial eccentricity of the mounting flange with respect
to the axis of the shaft end.
2) Applicable for "Performance", "High Performance" and "Premium Performance" versions

S/R = Signals/Revolution
DE = Drive End (motor drive side; A side of the motor)
NDE = Non-Drive End (motor fan side; B side of the motor)

Table 3-2 Water cooling

Insulation of the stator winding according to EN For a coolant inlet temperature of up to +30 °C
60034–1 (IEC 60034–1) Shaft height 80 ... 280: Temperature class 180 (H)3)
Cooling Water cooling
in accordance with EN 60034-6 (IEC 60034-6) Max. Cooling water pressure at inlet: 6 bar
connection thread at NDE
(for additional data, see Chapter "Mechanical properties of the motors")
Temperature monitoring Temperature sensor in the stator winding
Shaft heights 180 ... 280: Additional temperature sensor as a standby
Type Shaft height 80: IM B3, IM B5
in accordance with EN 60034-7 (IEC 60034-7) Shaft heights 100 ... IM B3, IM B5, IM B35
280:
Degree of protection Shaft heights 80 ... 160: IP65
in accordance with EN 60034-5 (IEC 60034-5) Shaft heights 180 ... IP55
280:
Shaft extension at the drive Plain shaft or feather key
end (DE) in accordance with DIN 748-3 (IEC For feather key, full-key or half-key balancing
60072-1)
Shaft and flange accuracy Shaft heights 80 ... 160: Tolerance R/A (reduced), SPECIAL2)
in accordance with DIN 42955 (IEC 60072-1)1) Shaft heights 180 ... Tolerance N (normal)
280:
Vibration magnitudes Shaft heights 80 ... 160: Level R/A, SPECIAL2)
in accordance with Siemens / EN 60034-14 (IEC Shaft height 180 ... 280: Level A
60034-14)
Sound pressure level Shaft heights 80 ... 132: 68 dB at a rated pulse frequency of 4 kHz and
in accordance with DIN EN ISO 1680, max. a speed range up to 5000 r/min
Tolerance +3 dB Shaft height 160: 69 dB at a rated pulse frequency of 4 kHz and
a speed range up to 5000 r/min
Shaft heights 180 and 70 dB at a rated pulse frequency
225: of 2 or 4 kHz and speed ranges:
• Shaft height 180 to 5000 r/min
• Shaft height 225 to 4500 r/min
Shaft height 280: 72 dB at a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz and
a speed range up to 3300 r/min
For additional data, see Chapter "Mechanical properties of the motors"

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

34 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.2 Technical characteristics and environmental conditions

Bearing versions and maximum speeds See Chapter "Mechanical properties of the motors"
Encoder systems, built-in • Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (AM2048 S/R encoder)
without • Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 2048 S/R with C and D tracks (en‐
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
coder IC2048S/R)
• Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 512 S/R without C and D tracks
(encoder IN512S/R)
• Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 256 S/R without C and D track
(encoder IN256S/R)
• Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder HTL1024 S/R)
• Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder HTL2048 S/R)
Encoder systems, built-in • Absolute encoder 22 bit singleturn + 12 bit multiturn (encoder
with AM22DQ)
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
• Incremental encoder 22 bit with commutation position (encoder
IC22DQ)
• Incremental encoder 20 bit without commutation position (encod‐
er IN20DQ)
• Incremental encoder 19 bit without commutation position (encod‐
er IN19DQ)
Connection Connector for signals or DRIVE-CLiQ interface
(mating connector is not included in the scope of supply)
Shaft heights 80 ...132: Terminal box NDE top/power connector
Shaft heights 160 ... 280: Terminal box NDE top
Rating plate (adhesive label) 1x glued on the motor
1x supplied loose in the terminal box
Paint finish Standard paint finish anthracite RAL 7016
Options See Options and Selection and Ordering data
Approvals, in accordance with cURus

1) Radial eccentricity of the shaft end, coaxiality of the centering wheel and axial eccentricity of the mounting flange with respect
to the axis of the shaft end.
2) Applicable for "Performance", "High Performance" and "Premium Performance" versions
3) Based on the design/version, the following motors have temperature class 155 (F):
1PH8107-1□F2
1PH8138-2
1PH8107-1□M2
1PH8164
1PH8166
1PH8168
S/R = signals/revolution
DE = Drive End (motor drive side; A side of the motor)
NDE = Non Drive End (motor fan side; B side of the motor)

3.2.3 Classifying environmental conditions according to climate classes

You can classify the environmental conditions for stationary use at weather-protected locations
according to standard DIN IEC 60721‑3‑3. The environmental parameters and their limit values
are defined in various classes in this standard.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 35
Motor description
3.3 Derating factors

You can assign the SIMOTICS M‑1PH8 main motors to climate class 3K4 with the exception of
the environmental parameter "condensation". Condensation is not permissible.
The higher the last number in the climate class 3K☐, the greater the requirements of the
motor.

Table 3-3 Environmental conditions are based on climate class 3K4

Environmental parameter Unit 3K4 class

a) Low air temperature °C +5
b) High air temperature °C + 40
c) Low relative humidity % 5
d) High relative humidity % 95
e) Low absolute humidity g/m3 1
f) High absolute humidity g/m 3
29
g) Rate of temperature change1) °C/min 0.5
h) Low air pressure kPa 70
i) High air pressure kPa 106
j) Solar radiation3) W/m2 700
k) Thermal radiation - 2)

l) Movement of the air m/s 1.0

m) Condensation - Not permissible
n) Wind-driven precipitation - -
(rain, snow, hail, etc.)
o) Water (other than rain) - 2)

p) Formation of ice - -
1)
Averaged over a period of 5 min
2)
See types of protection
3)
In Central Europe, the midday sun stands at 60 ° to 65 ° and, in ideal weather conditions, shines with an irradiance of approx.
700 watts/square meter. In winter, the angles are only 13 ° to 18 ° and, even at noon, the irradiance is only approx. 247 watts/
square meter.
You will find additional data on the ambient conditions, such as ambient temperatures
or conditions for transport and storage of the motors, in the relevant chapters of this
documentation.

3.3 Derating factors

Derating for ambient/coolant temperature

Operation: T = -15 °C bis +40 °C (without restriction)
Under conditions other than those specified above (ambient temperature > 40 °C or installation
altitude > 1000 m above sea level), the permissible torque/power reduction must be considered
(see Chapter "Ambient/coolant temperature (Page 69)")

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

36 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Derating for coolant inlet temperature

The motors are designed for operation up to a cooling water inlet temperature of +30 °C,
provided that all of the specified motor data is complied with. If the inlet temperature of the
cooling water deviates from this, the continuous torque will change (see Chapter "Cooling water
inlet temperature (Page 73)").

Derating factors for power and signal cables

The current-carrying capacity of PVC/PUR-insulated copper cables is specified for cable
installation types B1, B2, C and E under continuous operating conditions with reference to an
ambient air temperature of 40° C. For other ambient temperatures, the corresponding derating
factors must be considered (see Chapter "Derating factors for power and signal cables
(Page 230)").

3.3.1 Reduction of the max. DC-link voltage

At installation altitudes of 2000 m above sea level or higher, the voltage stress on the motors
must be reduced accordingly based on the table "Factors for reducing the maximum DC-link
voltage" (reciprocal values from EN 60664-1 Table A. 2).

Table 3-4 Factors for reducing the maximum DC-link voltage

Installation altitude above sea level up to Factor

m
2000 1
3000 0.877
4000 0.775
5000 0.656
6000 0.588
7000 0.513
8000 0.444

As the DC link voltage is reduced, the converter output voltage also decreases. This reduces
the working range in the torque-speed diagram.
You will find the torque-speed diagrams in this Chapter "Technical data."
Operation in a vacuum is not permissible because of the low dielectric strength and poor
heat dissipation.

3.4 Selection and ordering data

The Article No. supplements specified in the tables below define the ordering logic for 1PH8
motors and apply to induction and synchronous motors.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 37
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

The Article No. supplements are also in the catalogs. These supplements correspond to the
technical selection and ordering data of these catalogs.
Supplementary to the information in the catalogs, the technical selection and ordering data
are integrated in Chapter "Technical data and characteristics" of this Configuration Manual.
Depending on the electrical and mechanical configuration, Z options can be appended to the
Article No. suffixes.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

38 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

3.4.1 Article No. suffixes for shaft height 80 to 160

Descriptions Data position in Article No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 80 0 8
Shaft height 100 1 0
Shaft height 132 1 3
Shaft height 160 1 6
Overall length (cannot be selected, determined by the choice of
rated power)
Induction version 1
Synchronous version (only shaft height 132 and 160) 2
Encoder systems Without encoder 1) A 2
for Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder E 2
Motors without a AM2048S/R) 2)
DRIVE-CLiQ inter‐ Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder H 2
face HTL1024S/R) 1) 3)
Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder J 2
HTL2048S/R) 1) 4)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 2048 S/R with C and D M 2
tracks (encoder IC2048S/R) 2)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 512 S/R without C and T 2
D tracks (encoder IN512S/R) 1) 5) 10)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 256 S/R without C and C 2
D tracks (encoder IN256S/R) 1) 10)
Encoder systems Absolute encoder 22-bit- singleturn + 12-bit multiturn F 1
for (encoder AM22DQ) 2)
Motors with Incremental encoder 22-bit with commutation position D 1
DRIVE-CLiQ inter‐ (encoder IC22DQ) 2)
faces Incremental encoder 20 bit without commutation posi‐ U 1
tion (encoder IN20DQ) 1) 5) 10)
Incremental encoder 19-bit without commutation posi‐ S 1
tion (encoder IN19DQ) 1) 10)
Winding version Rated speeds (3 AC 380 V to 400 r/min, 500 r/min, B
480 V) 600 r/min, 700 r/min
1000 r/min, 1150 r/min, D
1350 r/min, 1500 r/min
1500 r/min, 1750 r/min, F
2000 r/min, 2200 r/min
2000 r/min, 2300 r/min, G
2650 r/min, 2800 r/min
2500 r/min, 2800 r/min, L
3000 r/min
3000 r/min, 3300 r/min, M
3600 r/min, 3900 r/min
4500 r/min, 5000 r/min, N
5500 r/min, 6000 r/min

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 39
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position in Article No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Star-delta connection (3 AC
1)
1500/4000 r/min, S
380 V to 480 V)) 2000/5000 r/min,
2500/6000 r/min
Cooling Forced ventilation DE -> NDE (degree of protection IP 55) 0
Forced ventilation NDE -> DE (degree of protection IP 55) 1
Water cooling (degree of protection IP 65) 2
Type of construc‐ IM B3 (IM V5, IM V6, IM B6, IM B7, IM B8) 0
tion IM B5 (IM V1, IM V3) 14) 2
IM B35 (IM V15, IM V35) 6)
3
Shaft extension Balancing
(DE)
Plain shaft --- 0
Fitted key 11) Full-key 1
Fitted key 11)
Half-key 2
Plain hollow --- 3
shaft 1) 10) 18)
Bearings Vibration quality acc. to Sie‐ Shaft and flange accuracy
mens/EN 60034-14
Standard with lo‐ R/A R B
cation bearing 15)
Standard with lo‐ S/A R C
cation bearing 15)
Standard with lo‐ SR/A R D
cation bearing 1) 15)
Standard 15) R/A R G
Standard 15)
S/A R H
Increased radial R/A R F
forces 15) 17)
Performance 7) SPECIAL/B SPECIAL L
High Perform‐ SPECIAL/B SPECIAL M
ance 13)
Advanced Life‐ S/A R Q
time 8) 15)
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connection (looking onto DE)
tion
Terminal box (top) Right DE A
Terminal box (top) Left DE B
Terminal box (top) NDE Left C
Terminal box DE Left D
(top) 16)
Power connector Right DE E
(top) 9) 12)
Power connector Left DE F
(top) 9) 12)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

40 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position in Article No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Power connector NDE Left G
(top) 9) 12)
Power connector DE Left H
(top) 9) 12)
Version
Without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, PT1000 temperature sensor in the stator winding 2
With a DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
Special version (order codes are Z
required for options)

1) Only possible if the 8th data position is "1" (induction version)

2) Limited to nmax = 12,000 r/min
3) Limited to nmax = 9000 r/min
4) Limited to nmax = 4600 r/min
5) Limited to nmax = 15,000 r/min
6) Only possible for shaft height 100, 132, and 160.
7) Only possible if 8th data position is "1" (induction version)
Shaft height 80: Limited to nmax = 15,000 r/min
shaft height 100: Limited to nmax = 12,000 r/min
shaft height 132: Limited to nmax = 10,000 r/min
shaft height 160: Limited to nmax = 9000 r/min, not possible if 12th data position is "2" (IM B5)
8) Limited to nmax = 5000 r/min, shaft height 132: nmax = 4500 r/min, shaft height 160: nmax = 4000 r/min
9) For a shaft height of 100, a power connector is only possible up to a maximum stall current of Io = 36 A,
for a shaft height of 132, a power connector is only possible up to a maximum stall current of Io = 85 A,
a power connector is not possible for shaft height 160
10) Only possible if 14th data position: L, M
11) Not possible if 14th data position: M
12) Not possible for motors in a star-delta (wye-delta) circuit if the 10th data position is "S"
13) Only possible if 8th data position is "1" (induction version)
Shaft height 80: Limited to nmax = 20,000 r/min
shaft height 100: Limited to nmax = 18,000 r/min
shaft height 132: Limited to nmax = 15,000 r/min
shaft height 160: Limited to nmax = 10,000 r/min, not possible if 12th data position is "2" (IM B5)
14) Not possible with shaft height 160 and 14th data position: L, M
15) Not possible if 9th data position: T, U
16) Not possible with shaft height 160 and 8th data position is "2" or "4" (synchronous version).
17) Limited to shaft height 100: nmax = 7000 r/min, shaft height 132: nmax = 6500 r/min, shaft height 160: nmax = 5300 r/min
18) Only possible for the 9th data position: A, C, and S

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 41
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

3.4.2 Article No. suffixes for SH 80 Premium Performance

Descriptions Data position in Article No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 80 0 8
Overall length 1
3
7
Induction version 1
Encoder sys‐ Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 256 S/R without C and D C 2
tems tracks (encoder N256S/R)
for motors
without a
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface
Encoder sys‐ Incremental encoder 19 bit without commutation position S 1
tems (encoder IN19DQ)
for motors with
a
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface
Winding ver‐ Rated speeds T
sion (3 AC 380 V to U
480 V) V
W
Cooling Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 0
tion DE -> NDE
Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 1
tion NDE -> DE
Water cooling (degree of protection IP 65) 2
Type of con‐ IM B5 (IM V1, IM V3) 2
struction
Shaft exten‐ Balancing
sion (DE) 1)
Plain shaft --- 0
Plain hollow --- 3
shaft 2)
Bearings Vibration se‐ Shaft and
verity acc. to flange accuracy
Siemens/EN
60034-14
Premium Per‐ SPECIAL/B SPECIAL N
formance 3)
Terminal box Cable entry Signal connec‐ (looking onto DE)
tion
Top Right DE A

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

42 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position in Article No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Top Left DE B
Top NDE Left C
Top DE Left D
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connec‐ (looking onto DE)
tor tion
Top Right DE E
Top Left DE F
Top NDE Left G
Top DE Left H
Version
Without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, PT1000 temperature sensor in the stator winding 2
With a DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
Options for SH 80 Premium Performance:
Prepared for bearingless rotary unions Y64
Sealing air connection Q12
Flange for design IM B5 with 4 x M8 threaded holes Q52

1) Shaft end 24 mm x 50 mm (d x l)
2) Only possible in combination with option Y64.
3) For cooling the greased bearing (to lengthen bearing replacement intervals) and to protect against penetrating liquid, Option
Q12 (sealing air connection) is recommended for the Premium Performance version.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 43
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

3.4.3 Article No. supplements for SH 132 and 160, synchronous-reluctance

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 132 1 3
Shaft height 160 1 6
Overall length (cannot be selected, determined by the choice of
rated power)
Reluctance version Efficiency 5
Reluctance version Performance 7

Encoder sys‐ Without encoder A 2

tems Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder AM2048S/R) E 2
for motors with‐ Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder HTL1024S/R) H 2
out a
Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder HTL2048S/R) J 2
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 2048 S/R with C and D M 2
track (encoder IC2048S/R)
Encoder sys‐ Absolute encoder 22 bit singleturn + 12 bit multiturn (en‐ F 1
tems coder AM22DQ)
for motors with Incremental encoder 22 bit with commutation position D 1
a (encoder IC22DQ)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface
Winding version Rated speeds 1000 r/min, 1150 r/min, D
(3 AC 380 V to 480 V) 1350 r/min, 1500 r/min (only
for forced ventilation)
1500 r/min, 1750 r/min, F
2000 r/min, 2200 r/min
2000 r/min, 2300 r/min, G
2650 r/min, 2800 r/min
Cooling Forced ventilation, DE-->NDE (degree of protection IP 55) 0
Forced ventilation, NDE-->DE (degree of protection IP 55) 1
Water cooling (degree of protection IP 65) 2
Type of con‐ IM B3 (IM V5, IM V6, IM B6, IM B7, IM B8) 0
struction
IM B5 (IM V1, IM V3) 2
IM B35 (IM V15, IM V35) 3
Shaft extension Balancing
(DE)
Plain shaft --- 0
Fitted key Full-key 1
Fitted key Half-key 2

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

44 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Bearings Vibration severity Shaft and flange ac‐
acc. to curacy
Siemens/EN
60034-14
Standard with lo‐ R/A R B
cating bearing
Standard with lo‐ S/A R C
cating bearing
Standard with lo‐ SR/A R D
cating bearing
Increased radial R/A R F
forces
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connection (looking onto DE)
tion
Terminal box Right DE A
(top)
Terminal box Left DE B
(top)
Terminal box NDE Left C
(top)
Terminal box DE Left D
(top) 1)
Version
With a DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
Without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, PT1000 temperature sensor in the stator winding 2
Special version (order codes are required for options) Z

1) Not possible for gk874 terminal boxes (1PH816 and 1PH8138-xxG2x)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 45
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

3.4.4 Article No. suffixes for SH 180 to 280

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 180 1 8
Shaft height 225 2 2
Shaft height 280 (only induction version and water 2 8
cooling)
Overall length (cannot be selected, determined by the choice of
rated power)
Induction version 1
Synchronous version 2

Encoder sys‐ Without encoder 1) A 2

tems Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder AM2048S/R) E 2
for motors with‐ Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder HTL1024S/R) H 2
out a 1)

DRIVE-CLiQ in‐ Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder J 2

terface HTL2048S/R) 1) 4)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 2048 S/R with C and D M 2
track (encoder IC2048S/R)
Encoder sys‐ Absolute encoder 22 bit singleturn + 12 bit multiturn (en‐ F 1
tems coder AM22DQ)
for motors with Incremental encoder 22 bit with commutation position D 1
a (encoder IC22DQ)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface
Winding version Rated speeds 400 r/min, 500 r/min, B
(3 AC 380 V to 480 V) 600 r/min, 700 r/min
700 r/min, 800 r/min, C
1000 r/min, 1100 r/min
1000 r/min, 1150 r/min, D
1350 r/min, 1500 r/min
1500 r/min, 1750 r/min, F
2000 r/min, 2200 r/min
2500 r/min, 2900 r/min, L
3200 (3400) r/min
Rated speeds 400 r/min, 500 r/min H
(3 AC 690 V) 700 r/min, 800 r/min K
for shaft height 280 1000 r/min, 1150 r/min U
1500 r/min, 1750 r/min W
Cooling Forced ventilation, DE-->NDE (degree of protection IP 55) 0
Forced ventilation, NDE-->DE (degree of protection IP 55) 1
Water cooling (degree of protection IP 55) 2

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

46 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Open-circuit ventilation, DE-- (degree of protection IP 23) 3
>NDE (for induction version
only)
Open-circuit ventilation, NDE-- 4
>DE (induction version only)
Type of con‐ Shaft height 180 Shaft height 225 Shaft height 280
struction
IM B3 (IM B6, IM B7, IM B8, IM V6) IM B3 (IM V6) 0
IM V5 M V5 9) 1
IM B5 with A450 IM B5 with A550 IM B5 with A660 flange 2
flange flange (IM V3) 7) 9)
(IM V3) 5) (IM V3) 6)
IM B35 with A450 IM B35 with A550 IM B35 with A660 flange 3
flange flange (IM V35)
(IM V35) (IM V35)
IM V15 with A450 IM V15 with A550 IM V15 with A660 flange 5
flange flange
Shaft extension Balancing
(DE)
Plain shaft --- 0
Fitted key Full-key 1
Fitted key Half-key 2
Bearings Vibration severity Shaft and flange ac‐
acc. to curacy
Siemens/EN
60034-14
Standard A N A
Standard R/A R B
Increased radial A N E
forces
Increased radial R/A R F
forces
Also possible for shaft heights 180 and 225:
Standard S/A R C
Standard 1)
SR/A R D
Performance 1) 8) SR/A R L
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connection (looking onto DE)
tion
Terminal box Right DE A
(top)
Terminal box Left DE B
(top)
Terminal box NDE Right C
(top)
Terminal box DE Right D
(top)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 47
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Version
Without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, PT1000 temperature sensor in the stator winding 2
With a DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
Special version (order codes are required for options) Z

1) Only possible if the 8th data position is "1" (induction version)

4) Limited to nmax = 4600 r/min
5) Limited to nmax = 3000 r/min, not possible if 14th data position is "L" (Performance).
6) Limited to nmax = 2500 r/min, not possible if 14th data position is "L" (Performance).
7) Limited to nmax = 2000 r/min
8) Only possible with shaft height 180: Limited to nmax = 7500 r/min,
not possible if the 12th data position is "2" (IM B5) and the 11th data position is "3" and "4" (open-circuit ventilation)
only possible for shaft height 225: Limited to nmax = 6000 r/min,
not possible if the 12th data position is "2" (IM B5) and the 11th data position is "3" and "4" (open-circuit ventilation)
9) Only possible if 14th data position is "A" or "B" (standard bearings)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

48 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

3.4.5 Article No. suffixes for SH 280

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 280 (forced ventilation and open-cir‐ 2 8
cuit ventilation)
Overall length (cannot be selected, determined by the choice of
rated power)
Induction version 1
Encoder sys‐ Without encoder A 2
tems Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder AM2048S/R) E 2
for motors Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder HTL1024S/R) H 2
without a
Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder HTL2048S/R) J 2
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, 2048 S/R with C and D M 2
track (encoder IC2048S/R)
Encoder sys‐ Absolute encoder, 22-bit singleturn + 12-bit multiturn (en‐ F 1
tems coder AM22DQ)
for motors with Incremental encoder, 22-bit, with commutation position D 1
a (encoder IC22DQ)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface
External encod‐ Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R POG 22 (Baumer-Hüb‐ G
er systems ner), prepared for mounting 1)
Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R POG 10 (Baumer-Hüb‐ K
ner), prepared for mounting 2)
Winding ver‐ Rated speeds 400 r/min, 500 r/min, 600 r/min, 700 r/min B
sion (3 AC 380 V to 700 r/min, 800 r/min, 1000 r/min, 1100 r/min C
480 V) 1000 r/min, 1150 r/min, 1350 r/min, D
1500 r/min
1500 r/min, 1750 r/min, 2000 r/min, F
2200 r/min
Rated speeds 400 r/min, 500 r/min H
(690 V 3 AC) 700 r/min, 800 r/min K
1000 r/min, 1150 r/min U
1500 r/min, 1750 r/min W
Cooling Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 1
tion
Forced ventila‐ (open-circuit ventilation with degree of protection 4
tion IP 23)
Type of con‐ IM B3 (IM V6) 0
struction IM V5 6) 1
IM B5 with A660 flange (IM V3) 6)
2
IM B35 with A660 flange (IM V35) 3
IM V15 with A660 flange 5

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 49
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Shaft exten‐ Balancing
sion (DE)
Smooth shaft --- 0
(without key‐
way)
Fitted key Full-key 1
Fitted key Half-key 2
Bearings Vibration se‐ Shaft and
verity acc. to flange accuracy
Siemens/EN
60034-14
Standard A N A
Standard R/A R B
Increased radial A N E
forces
Increased radial R/A R F
forces
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connec‐ External fan
tion tion
Terminal box Bottom DE U
NDE right NDE top, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE ---
NDE left, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE G00
Terminal box Bottom DE V
NDE left NDE top, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE ---
NDE right, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE G02
Terminal box Right DE W
NDE top NDE left, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE G00
NDE right, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE G02
Terminal box DE Right NDE X
top 4) NDE top, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE 4) 5) ---
NDE left, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE 4)
G00
NDE right, air inlet from NDE, air-flow direction NDE-->DE 4) G02
Version
Without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, PT1000 temperature sensor in the stator winding 2
With a DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
For other versions, see options Z

1) When ordering, also select option H75

2) When ordering, also select options H56 or G80
4) Only possible if 12th data position is "0" (IM B3) and "1" (IM V5).
5) Only possible for assignments with terminal box 1XB7712-P..
6) Only possible if 14th data position is "A" and "B" (standard bearings); nmax limited to 2000 r/min
7) Only possible for the following combinations:
12th data position is "0" or "1" if 15th data position is "W" or "X"

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

50 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

12th data position is "2," "3," or "5" if 15th data position "W"

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 51
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

3.4.6 Article No. supplement for shaft height 80 to 160 + holding brake DE

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 80 0 8
Shaft height 100 1 0
Shaft height 132 1 3
Shaft height 160 1 6
Overall length (cannot be selected, determined by the choice of
rated power)
Induction version with holding brake 1) 3
Synchronous version with holding brake (only shaft heights 132 and 4
160) 1)
Encoder sys‐ without encoder 2) A 2
tems Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder AM2048S/R) E 2
for motors Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder H 2
without a HTL1024S/R) 2)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐ Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder J 2
terface HTL2048S/R) 2)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, 2048 S/R with C and D M 2
track (encoder IC2048S/R)
Encoder sys‐ Absolute encoder, 22-bit singleturn + 12-bit multiturn (en‐ F 1
tems coder AM22DQ)
for motors with Incremental encoder, 22-bit, with commutation position D 1
a (encoder IC22DQ)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface
Winding version
Cooling Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 0
tion DE -> NDE
Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 1
tion NDE -> DE
Water cooling (degree of protection IP 55) 4) 2
Type of con‐ IM B5 (IM V1, IM 2
struction V3) 5)
IM B35 (IM V15, 3
IM V35) 8)
Shaft exten‐ Balancing
sion (DE)
Smooth shaft --- 0
(without key‐
way)
Fitted key Half-key 2
Bearings Vibration se‐ Shaft and
verity acc. to

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

52 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Siemens/EN flange accuracy
60034-14
Standard A N A
Advanced Life‐ A N P
time
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connec‐ (looking onto DE)
tion 6) tion
Terminal box Right DE A
(top)
Terminal box Left DE B
(top)
Terminal box NDE Left C
(top)
Terminal box DE Left D
(top) 10)
Power connec‐ Right DE E
tor (top) 3) 7)
Power connec‐ Left DE F
tor (top) 3) 7)
Power connec‐ NDE Left G
tor (top) 3) 7)
Power connec‐ DE Left H
tor (top) 3) 7)
Version
Without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, PT1000 temperature sensor in the stator winding 2
With a DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
Brake versions:
Brake supply voltage Holding brake DE U60
230 V 1 AC, 50/60 Hz Holding brake DE with microswitch U61
Holding brake DE with manual brake release lever U62
Holding brake DE with microswitch and manual brake release lever U63
Brake supply voltage Holding brake DE U65
24 V DC Holding brake DE with microswitch U66
Holding brake DE with manual brake release lever U67
Holding brake DE with microswitch and manual brake release lever U68
Z options that cannot be combined with holding brake DE: K18, V91, M03, M39

1) A U option must also be stated in the order to specify the holding brake version.
Shaft height 80: limited to nmax = 5000 r/min
Shaft height 100: limited to nmax = 5000 r/min
Shaft height 132: limited to nmax = 4500 r/min
Shaft height 160: limited to nmax = 4000 r/min
2) Only possible if 8th data position is "3" (induction version)
4) With holding brake, degree of protection is limited to IP55.
5) Not possible with shaft height 160.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 53
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

6) A holding brake can only be connected via a terminal box (top).

7) Power connector for motor only (not with holding brake):
Power connector for shaft height 100 only possible up to a maximum stall current of Io = 36 A.
Power connector for shaft height 132 only possible up to a maximum stall current of Io = 85 A.
Power connector not possible for shaft height 160
8) Not possible for shaft height 80
9) Only possible if 15th data position: A and B
10) Not possible with shaft height 160 and 8th data position is "4" (synchronous version)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

54 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

3.4.7 Article No. supplement for SH 132 and 160, synchronous-reluctance +

holding brake

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 132 1 3
Shaft height 160 1 6
Overall length (cannot be selected, determined by the choice of
rated power)
Reluctance version Efficiency with holding brake 6
Reluctance version Performance with holding brake 8
Encoder sys‐ Without encoder A 2
tems Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder AM2048S/R) E 2
for motors Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder HTL1024S/R) H 2
without a
Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder HTL2048S/R) J 2
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, 2048 S/R with C and D M 2
track (encoder IC2048S/R)
Encoder sys‐ Absolute encoder, 22-bit singleturn + 12-bit multiturn (en‐ F 1
tems coder AM22DQ)
for motors with Incremental encoder, 22-bit, with commutation position D 1
a (encoder IC22DQ)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface
Winding ver‐ Rated speeds 1000 r/min, 1150 r/min, 1350 r/min, D
sion (3 AC 380 V to 1500 r/min (only for forced ventilation)
480 V) 1500 r/min, 1750 r/min, 2000 r/min, F
2200 r/min
2000 r/min, 2300 r/min, 2650 r/min, G
2800 r/min
Cooling Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 0
tion DE -> NDE
Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 1
tion NDE -> DE
Water cooling (degree of protection IP 55) 2
Type of con‐ IM B5 (IM V1, IM (not possible for shaft height 160) 2
struction V3)
IM B35 (IM V15, 3
IM V35)
Shaft exten‐ Balancing
sion (DE)
Smooth shaft --- 0
(without key‐
way)
Fitted key Half-key 2
Bearings Vibration se‐ Shaft and
verity acc. to

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 55
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Siemens/EN flange accuracy
60034-14
Standard A N A
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connec‐ (looking onto DE)
tion tion
Terminal box Right DE A
(top)
Terminal box Left DE B
(top)
Terminal box NDE Left C
(top)
Terminal box DE Left D
(top) 1)
Version
With a DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
Without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, PT1000 temperature sensor in the stator winding 2
Special version (order codes are required for options) Z

1) Not possible for gk874 terminal boxes (1PH816 and 1PH8138-xxG2x )

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

56 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

3.4.8 Article No. supplements for SH 180 to 225 + holding brake

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 180 1 8
Shaft height 225 2 2
Overall length
Induction version with holding brake 1) 3
Synchronous version with holding brake 1)
4
Encoder sys‐ without encoder 2) A 2
tems Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder AM2048S/R) E 2
for motors Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder H 2
without a HTL1024S/R) 2)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐ Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder J 2
terface HTL2048S/R) 2)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, 2048 S/R with C and D M 2
track (encoder IC2048S/R)
Encoder sys‐ Absolute encoder, 22-bit singleturn + 12-bit multiturn (en‐ F 1
tems coder AM22DQ)
for motors with Incremental encoder, 22-bit, with commutation position D 1
a (encoder IC22DQ)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐
terface
Winding version
Cooling Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 0
tion, DE-->NDE
Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 1
tion, NDE-->DE
Water cooling (degree of protection IP 55) 2
Open-circuit (degree of protection IP 23) 4
ventilation,
NDE-->DE (in‐
duction version
only)
Type of con‐ IM B3 (IM B6, IM 0
struction B7, IM B8)
Shaft exten‐ Balancing
sion (DE)
Fitted key Half-key 2
Bearings Vibration se‐ Shaft and
verity acc. to flange accuracy
Siemens/EN
60034-14
Standard A N A
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connec‐ (looking onto DE)
tion 3) tion

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 57
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Descriptions Data position of the order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Terminal box Right DE A
(top)
Terminal box Left DE B
(top)
Terminal box NDE Right C
(top)
Terminal box DE Right D
(top)
Version
Without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, PT1000 temperature sensor in the stator winding 2
With a DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
Brake versions:
Brake supply voltage Holding brake DE with microswitch and manual brake release lever U63
230 V 1 AC, 50/60 Hz
Z options that cannot be combined with holding brake DE: K18, K90, L03, V92, M39

1) A U option must also be stated in the order to specify the holding brake version.
Shaft height 180: limited to nmax = 3500 r/min
Shaft height 225: limited to nmax = 3100 r/min
2) Only possible if 8th data position is "3" (induction version)
3) A holding brake can only be connected via a brake terminal box (top).

3.4.9 Options

Order Option description For use with motors

code "✓" = Option possible,
"---" = Option not possible
When ordering a motor with options, add a -Z to the order Shaft height Shaft height Shaft height
number. 80 to 160 180 to 280 280
Specify the order code for every option required. For order For forced
codes, avoid repeating the order codes in text form in the or‐ ventilation
der. only
(11th data
position is "1"
or "4")
A12 Additional PTC thermistor circuit for alarm and trip (only possible ✓ ✓ ✓
for version with terminal box)
A25 Additional temperature sensor as reserve connected to signal ter‐ ✓ Standard Standard
minal strip
(only possible for version with terminal box)
A72 2 PT100 resistance thermometers for bearing temperature moni‐ --- ✓ ✓
toring (DE and NDE)
B02 Factory test certificate in accordance with EN 10204 2.3 (for motor ✓ Standard Standard
ordered)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

58 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Order Option description For use with motors

code "✓" = Option possible,
"---" = Option not possible
When ordering a motor with options, add a -Z to the order Shaft height Shaft height Shaft height
number. 80 to 160 180 to 280 280
Specify the order code for every option required. For order For forced
codes, avoid repeating the order codes in text form in the or‐ ventilation
der. only
(11th data
position is "1"
or "4")
B35 Factory test certificate for vibration log ✓ ✓ 5) ✓ 5)
B36 Factory test certificate for run-out log ✓ Only for SH ---
180
and SH 225
G00 External fan NDE left, air inlet at NDE --- --- ✓
(possible if 15th data position is U, W, or X)
G02 External fan NDE right, air inlet at NDE --- --- ✓
(possible if 15th data position is V, W, or X)
G06 External fan DE left, air inlet NDE --- --- ✓
(possible if 11th position =1 and 15th position = U, V, or W; pos‐
sible if 11th position =4 and 15th position = W)
G07 External fan DE left, air inlet DE --- --- ✓
(possible if 11th position =1 and 15th position = U, V, or W; pos‐
sible if 11th position =4 and 15th position = W)
G08 External fan DE right, air inlet NDE --- --- ✓
(possible if 11th position =1 and 15th position = U, V, or W; pos‐
sible if 11th position =4 and 15th position = W)
G09 External fan DE right, air inlet DE --- --- ✓
(possible if 11th position =1 and 15th position = U, V, or W; pos‐
sible if 11th position =4 and 15th position = W)
G11 External fan DE top, air inlet DE --- --- ✓
(possible if 11th position =1 and 15th position = U, V, or W; pos‐
sible if 11th position =4 and 15th position = W)
G14 With external fan (only possible if 11th data position is "1" or "4") Only for SH ✓ ✓
132
and SH 160
G50 Nipple for SPM, with M8 adapter --- ✓ ✓
G80 Mounting of a POG 10 incremental encoder supplied by customer --- --- ✓
(possible if 9th data position is "K")
H56 Mounting an incremental encoder POG 10 D 1024 (encoder --- --- ✓
HTL1024S/R)
(possible if the 9th data position is "K")
H75 Mounting of a hollow shaft encoder HOG 22 --- --- ✓
supplied by the customer (possible if the 9th data position is "G")
K08 Encoder connection or DRIVE-CLiQ mounted on the opposite side --- ✓ ✓
(not possible if 15th data position is "X")

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 59
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Order Option description For use with motors

code "✓" = Option possible,
"---" = Option not possible
When ordering a motor with options, add a -Z to the order Shaft height Shaft height Shaft height
number. 80 to 160 180 to 280 280
Specify the order code for every option required. For order For forced
codes, avoid repeating the order codes in text form in the or‐ ventilation
der. only
(11th data
position is "1"
or "4")
K09 Terminal box or power connector NDE right Only for SH --- ---
100 1)
to SH 160
Terminal box NDE right, cable entry DE, signal connection top --- ✓ ---
(possible if the 15th data position is "A")
K10 Terminal box or power connector NDE left Only for SH --- ---
100 1)
to SH 160
Terminal box NDE left, cable entry DE, signal connection top (pos‐ --- ✓ ---
sible if the 15th data position is "A")
K16 Second shaft extension (d x l: 95 mm x 170 mm) --- --- ✓
(possible if the 9th data position is "A" or "G" and 12th data position
is "0" or "3")
K17 Labyrinth seal DE for Performance version (14th data position "L") --- Only for SH ---
180
K18 Radial shaft sealing ring DE 2) ✓ ✓ ---
K40 Regreasing system, DE and NDE --- Only for SH Standard
180
and SH 225
K45 AC 230 V anti-condensation heating --- ✓ ✓
K69 Prepared for pipe connection NDE right (only possible for forced --- --- ✓
ventilation, not for G00 to G11)
K70 Prepared for pipe connection NDE left (only possible for forced --- --- ✓
ventilation, not for G00 to G11)
K71 Prepared for pipe connection NDE top (only possible for forced --- --- ✓
ventilation, not for G00 to G11)
K80 Axial pipe connection NDE (only possible with forced ventilation) --- Only for SH Options K69,
180 K70, K71
and SH 225
K83 Rotation of the terminal box through +90 degrees (possible in --- ✓ 4) ✓
combination with option K09 or K10 or if the 15th data position is
"U", "V" or "W")
K84 Rotation of the terminal box through -90 degrees (possible in --- ✓ 4) ✓
combination with option K09 or K10 or if the 15th data position is
"U", "V", "W" or "X")
K85 Rotation of the terminal box through +180 degrees (possible in --- ✓ ✓
combination with option K09 or K10 or if the 15th data position is
"U", "V", "W" or "X")

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

60 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Order Option description For use with motors

code "✓" = Option possible,
"---" = Option not possible
When ordering a motor with options, add a -Z to the order Shaft height Shaft height Shaft height
number. 80 to 160 180 to 280 280
Specify the order code for every option required. For order For forced
codes, avoid repeating the order codes in text form in the or‐ ventilation
der. only
(11th data
position is "1"
or "4")
K90 Version with flange size A400 (possible if 12th data position is "2", --- Only for SH ---
"3" or "5") 180
L00 Replace terminal box (standard) with the next largest terminal box --- ✓ ✓
(note dimension implications in the SPC)
L03 Increased resistance to vibration --- Only for SH ---
180
and SH 225
L12 Condensation drain hole --- Standard for Only if the
water cooling 11th data po‐
sition is "1"
L27 NDE bearing with insulated shaft --- Only for SH Standard
180
L29 Enhanced corrosion protection for installation in industrial/marine --- --- ✓
climates
L72 Shaft made of special steel (note: option results in longer delivery --- --- ✓
times)
L74 Fan version in IP65 degree of protection 3) ✓ --- ---
L76 EC fan 3 AC 400 V 50/60 Hz --- Only for SH ---
180
and SH 225
M03 Version for potentially explosive atmospheres Zone 2 Only for SH --- ---
100 to
SH 160
M39 Version for potentially explosive atmospheres Zone 22 Only for SH Only for SH ---
100 to 180
SH 160 and SH 225
M83 Additional back-off thread on motor feet (only possible if 12th data --- --- ✓
position is "0" or "3")
P00 Undrilled cable entry plate --- ✓ Not for
1XB7820-P00
P01 Cable entry plate 3 x M63 x 1.5 --- Only for Only for
1XB7700-P02 1XB7712-P03
1XB7712-P03
P02 Cable entry plate 3 x M75 x 1.5 --- Only for Only for
1XB7712-P03 1XB7712-P01
1XB7712-P03
P03 Cable entry plate 4 x M75 x 1.5 --- --- Only for
1XB7712-P01

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 61
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Order Option description For use with motors

code "✓" = Option possible,
"---" = Option not possible
When ordering a motor with options, add a -Z to the order Shaft height Shaft height Shaft height
number. 80 to 160 180 to 280 280
Specify the order code for every option required. For order For forced
codes, avoid repeating the order codes in text form in the or‐ ventilation
der. only
(11th data
position is "1"
or "4")
P04 Cable entry plate 4 x M63 x 1.5 --- Only for Only for
1XB7712-P03 1XB7712-P01
1XB7712-P03
Q00 Increase number of grounding terminals in the terminal box --- --- ✓
Q12 Sealing air connection ✓ --- ---
Q21 Screw locked with Loctite --- ✓ ⇓
Q25 Q25 fan connection NDE or at the top with M16x1.5 Only for SH --- ---
100 to
SH 160
Q31 Metal nameplate instead of adhesive label ✓ ✓ ✓
Q52 Flange for design IM B5 with 4 x M8 threaded holes (only possible Only for SH 80 --- ---
when 14th data position is "N")
Q81 Increased bearing preloading (only possible if the 14th data posi‐ ✓ --- ---
tion "B", "C" and "D")
U60 230 V holding brake ✓ --- ---
U61 230 V holding brake with micro-switch ✓ --- ---
U62 230 V holding brake with manual brake release lever ✓ --- ---
U63 230 V holding brake with micro-switch and manual brake release ✓ Only for SH ---
lever 180
and SH 225
U65 24 V DC holding brake ✓ --- ---
U66 24 V DC holding brake with microswitch ✓ --- ---
U67 24 V DC holding brake with manual brake release lever ✓ --- ---
U68 24 V DC holding brake with micro-switch and manual brake re‐ ✓ --- ---
lease lever
V90 1PH7-compatible shaft extension (d x l: 42 mm x 110 mm) Only for SH --- ---
(reduced radial forces must be observed; only possible if the 8th 132
data position is "1" or "3")
V91 1FT6-compatible shaft extension (d x l: 48 mm x 82 mm) Only for SH --- ---
(only possible for 8th data position is "2") 132
V92 1PH7184-/1PL6184-compatible shaft extension (d x l: 60 mm x --- Only for ---
140 mm) 1PH8184
(possible if the 8th data position is "1")
Y64 Hollow shaft prepared for bearingless rotary unions with flange ✓ --- ---
diameter 114H6
Y82 Extra nameplate with customer specifications (plain text required) --- ✓ ✓
Y84 Customer specifications on nameplate (max. 30 characters) ✓ ✓ ✓
--- Paint finish anthracite RAL 7016 Standard Standard Standard

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

62 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Order Option description For use with motors

code "✓" = Option possible,
"---" = Option not possible
When ordering a motor with options, add a -Z to the order Shaft height Shaft height Shaft height
number. 80 to 160 180 to 280 280
Specify the order code for every option required. For order For forced
codes, avoid repeating the order codes in text form in the or‐ ventilation
der. only
(11th data
position is "1"
or "4")
X01 Paint finish in RAL 9005 (jet black) ✓ ✓ ✓
X02 Paint finish in RAL 9001 (cream white) ✓ ✓ ✓
X03 Paint finish in RAL 6011 (reseda green) ✓ ✓ ✓
X04 Paint finish in RAL 7032 (pebble gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
X05 Paint finish in RAL 5015 (sky blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X06 Paint finish in RAL 1015 (light ivory) ✓ ✓ ✓
X08 Paint finish in RAL 9006 (white aluminum) ✓ ✓ ✓
X11 Paint finish in RAL 6019 (pastel green) ✓ ✓ ✓
X12 Paint finish in RAL 5010 (gentian blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X13 Paint finish in RAL 5024 (pastel blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X14 Paint finish in RAL 5017 (traffic blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X15 Paint finish in RAL 9010 (pure white) ✓ ✓ ✓
X16 Paint finish in RAL 6018 (yellow green) ✓ ✓ ✓
X17 Paint finish in RAL 5014 (pigeon blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X18 Paint finish in RAL 9018 (papyrus white) ✓ ✓ ✓
X19 Paint finish in RAL 2004 (pure orange) ✓ ✓ ✓
X20 Paint finish in HWS (gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
X21 Paint finish in RAL 9003 (signal white) ✓ ✓ ✓
X22 Paint finish in RAL 9002 (gray white) ✓ ✓ ✓
X23 Paint finish in RAL 5005 (signal blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X24 Paint finish in RAL 7001 (sliver gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
X25 Paint finish in RAL 1000 (green beige) ✓ ✓ ✓
X26 Paint finish in RAL 6017 (May green) ✓ ✓ ✓
X27 Paint finish in RAL 9023 (pearl dark gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
X28 Paint finish in RAL 5009 (azure blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X29 Paint finish in RAL 7005 (mouse gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
X30 Paint finish in RAL 1014 (ivory) ✓ ✓ ✓
X31 Paint finish in RAL 5007 (brilliant blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X44 Paint finish in RAL 1023 (traffic yellow) ✓ ✓ ✓
X50 Paint finish in RAL 3004 (purple red) ✓ ✓ ✓
X51 Paint finish in RAL 2003 (pastel orange) ✓ ✓ ✓
X52 Paint finish in RAL 3000 (flame red) ✓ ✓ ✓
X53 Paint finish in RAL 7035 (light gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
X54 Paint finish in RAL 7004 (signal gray) ✓ ✓ ✓

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 63
Motor description
3.4 Selection and ordering data

Order Option description For use with motors

code "✓" = Option possible,
"---" = Option not possible
When ordering a motor with options, add a -Z to the order Shaft height Shaft height Shaft height
number. 80 to 160 180 to 280 280
Specify the order code for every option required. For order For forced
codes, avoid repeating the order codes in text form in the or‐ ventilation
der. only
(11th data
position is "1"
or "4")
X55 Paint finish in RAL 7038 (agate gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
X56 Paint finish in RAL 1013 (oyster white) ✓ ✓ ✓
X57 Paint finish in RAL 5012 (light blue) ✓ ✓ ✓
X58 Paint finish in RAL 2001 (red orange) ✓ ✓ ✓
X59 Paint finish in RAL 7030 (stone gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
X91 Paint finish in RAL 7011 (iron gray) ✓ ✓ ✓
K24 Primer Pale green Red brown Red brown
K23 Special paint finish "Worldwide" (anthracite RAL 7016) ✓ ✓ ✓
K23 + Special finish "Worldwide" in another color (X01 to X91) ✓ ✓ ✓
X..

1) Not possible if 12th data position is "2" (type of construction IM B5)

2) Only recommended if oil spray/mist occasionally gets onto the sealing ring. Radial shaft sealing ring not possible if: 14th data
position is "E", "F" and "L", "M"
3) Regardless of the degree of protection, for high pollution levels of the ambient air, the fan must be cleaned.
4) Not possible for 1PH822 and terminal box 1XB7712-P03
5) Not possible if the 14th data position is "E" and "F"

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

64 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.5 Rating plate data

3.5 Rating plate data

The nameplate (rating plate) shows the technical specifications for the supplied motor.

SIEMENS
ฏ0RW 3 / 12 <) / /


/ %$5&2'(
'

,0 / ,3 / 7+&/ /

81 9 ,1 $ 31 N: / I1 +] Q1 PLQ /

/ / / / / / / /

/ / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / (1
/ / / / / / / /
,PD[ $ / 0PD[ 1P / QPD[ PLQ /

/ /
8//
/ / / /

/ /
/
P / NJ /

6LHPHQV$*,QGXVWULHVWU'(%DG1HXVWDGW 0DGHLQ*HUPDQ\

*) Some fields may also be empty (options, customer data)

Figure 3-3 Nameplate layout for 1PH808 to 1PH816

Table 3-5 Elements on the rating plate

No. Description No. Description

L010 Article No. L210 Rated power PN (3)
L012 Consecutive number L220 cos φ (3)
L020 Factory serial number L230 Rated frequency fN (3)
L025 UL mark L240 Rated speed nN (3)
L030 Type of construction L250 Operating mode (3)
L040 Degree of protection L257 Rated voltage UN (4)
L042 Temperature class L258 Connection method (4)
L045 Balancing code L260 Rated current IN (4)
L048 Operating mode L261 Rated power PN (4)
L049 for synchronous motors: induced voltage at rated L263 cos φ (4)
speed VIN
for induction motors: cos φ L265 Rated frequency fN (4)
L050 Rated voltage UN (1) L266 Rated speed nN (4)
L051 Connection method (1) L267 Operating mode (4)
L060 Rated current IN (1) L270 Maximum current Imax

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 65
Motor description
3.5 Rating plate data

No. Description No. Description

L070 Rated power PN (1) L275 Maximum torque Mmax
L080 cos φ (1) L280 Maximum speed nmax
L090 Rated frequency fN (1) L285 Temperature sensor
L100 Rated speed nN (1) L290 Encoder
L110 Operating mode (1) L295 Cooling method
L120 Rated voltage UN (2) L296 Throughput l/min (m3/s)
L121 Connection method (2) L297 System pressure
L130 Rated current IN (2) L298 Maximum coolant temperature
L140 Rated power PN (2) L315 Options (I)
L150 cos φ (2) L320 Options (II)
L160 Rated frequency fN (2) L325 Optional customer information
L170 Rated speed nN (2) L330 Anti-condensation heating
L180 Operating mode (2) L335 Weight
L190 Rated voltage UN (3)
L191 Connection method (3)
L200 Rated current IN (3)

The rating plate (type plate) shows the technical specifications for the supplied motor.

a0RW  1R1  

,0  ,3  7+&/ +   

8 1 9 , 1 $ 31 N: FRV˳ I 1 +] Q 1 PLQ &2'( 

        
        
         

        

  QPD[ PLQ 

,(&(1
 

   

 

 

6LHPHQV$* 

0DGHLQ*HUPDQ\'1¾UQEHUJ

Figure 3-4 Nameplate layout for 1PH818 to 1PH828

Table 3-6 Elements on the rating plate

No. Description No. Description

010 Article No. 200 Rated current IN (3)
012 Consecutive number, part of serial number 210 Rated power PN (3)
020 Serial number 220 cos φ (3)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

66 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor description
3.5 Rating plate data

No. Description No. Description

025 UL mark 230 Rated frequency fN (3)
026 (blank) 240 Rated speed nN (3)
030 Type of construction 250 Operating mode (3)
035 (blank) 255 Code for operating point 3
036 (blank) 260 Rated voltage UN (4)
040 Degree of protection 261 Switching mode 4
045 Type of balancing 270 Rated current IN (4)
050 Rated voltage UN (1) 280 Rated power PN (4)
051 Switching mode 1 290 cos φ (4)
060 Rated current IN (1) 300 Rated frequency fN (4)
070 Rated power PN (1) 310 Rated speed nN (4)
080 cos φ (1) 320 Operating mode (4)
090 Rated frequency fN (1) 325 Code for operating point 4
100 Rated speed nN (1) 330 Maximum current IMAX
110 Operating mode (1) 335 Weight
115 Code for operating point 1 340 Maximum torque MMAX
120 Rated voltage UN (2) 350 Maximum speed nMAX
121 Switching mode 2 360 Temperature sensor
130 Rated current IN (2) 370 Tachometer/resolver
140 Rated power PN (2) 380 Cooling method
150 cos φ (2) 390 Throughput l/min (m3/s)
160 Rated frequency fN (2) 400 System pressure
170 Rated speed nN (2) 410 Maximum coolant temperature
180 Operating mode (2) 420 Options (I)
185 Code for operating point 2 430 Options (II)
190 Rated voltage UN (3) 440 Optional customer information
191 Switching mode 3 450 Anti-condensation heating / dummy

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 67
Motor description
3.5 Rating plate data

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

68 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Mechanical properties 4
4.1 Cooling

4.1.1 General
The following table shows an overview of the available variants of cooling system.

Table 4-1 Cooling system variants of 1PH8 motors

Shaft height Motor type Forced ventilation Water cooling

80 Induction ⇓ ⇓
100 Induction ⇓ ⇓
132 Induction, synchronous-reluc‐ ⇓ ⇓
tance and synchronous
160 Induction, synchronous-reluc‐ ⇓ ⇓
tance and synchronous
180 Induction and synchronous ⇓ ⇓
225 Induction and synchronous ⇓ ⇓
280 Induction ⇓ ⇓

4.1.2 Forced ventilation

When mounting the forced ventilated motor, make sure the motor is well ventilated. Good
ventilation is especially important for encapsulated installation. Avoid warm exhaust air being
drawn in again. The cooling air must flow in and out without restriction. Avoid accumulated dirt
in the cooling ducts as this can reduce the cooling air flow.
All catalog data refer to an ambient temperature of 40 °C and an installation altitude up to
1000 m above sea level.

NOTICE
Thermal damage to temperature-sensitive parts
The motors can have surface temperatures of over +100 °C. Temperature-sensitive parts in
contact with the motor or attached to the motor can be damaged. Temperature-sensitive parts
include cables and electronic components, for example.
• Never attach temperature-sensitive parts to the motor.
• Ensure that no temperature-sensitive parts are in contact with the motor.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 69
Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Ambient/coolant temperature
Operation: T = -15 °C to +40 °C (without any restrictions)
Under conditions other than those specified above (ambient temperature > 40 °C or installation
altitude > 1000 m above sea level), you must determine the permissible torque/power reduction
from the following table. Ambient temperatures and installation altitudes are rounded off to 5 °C
or 500 m respectively.

Table 4-2 Factors for reducing the torque/power acc. to EN 60034-6

Installation altitude Ambient temperature in ° C

above sea level 40 45 50 551)
1000 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.87
1500 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.84
2000 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82
2500 0.90 0.86 0.83 0.78
3000 0.86 0.82 0.79 0.75
3500 0.82 0.79 0.75 0.71
4000 0.77 0.74 0.71 0.67

1) Only permitted for the "NDE" ⇒ "DE" direction of air flow

Note
Higher ambient temperatures
For ambient temperatures > 55 °C, contact your local sales partner.
The standard motors are not suitable for use in corrosive atmospheres, atmospheres with a high
salt content, or in outdoor applications.

Mounting a fan and minimum clearance to parts and components mounted by the customer

Table 4-3 Fan mounting

Shaft height Fan mounting

mm
80 to 225 NDE axial, can be rotated through 180°
280 NDE radial, different mounting types can be ordered

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

70 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Table 4-4 Minimum distance S between the air intake/outlet openings and other adjacent
components

Shaft height Minimum clearance S

mm mm
80 30
100 30
6
132 60
160 80
180/225 100
280 120

Ventilation data and sound pressure levels

Table 4-5 Ventilation data and sound pressure levels

Shaft Air flow direc‐ Degree Airflow rate, Air discharge Sound pressure level LpA (1 m) Pressure
height tion of protec‐ min. Motor + operation with an exter‐ drop (Δp)
mm tion m3/s nal fan 50 Hz rated load, toler‐ Pa
ance +3 dB
dB
80 NDE → DE IP55 0.02 Axial 701) 95
DE → NDE
100 NDE → DE IP55 0.04 110
DE → NDE
132 NDE → DE IP55 0.09 140
DE → NDE
160 NDE → DE IP55 0.16 731) 200
DE → NDE
180 NDE → DE IP23 0.21 732) 450
DE → NDE IP55 0.17 550
225 NDE → DE IP23 0.33 600
DE → NDE IP55 0.31 650
280 NDE → DE IP23 0.52 Radial 742)
600
DE → NDE IP55 0.42 600

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 71
Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

1) At a rated pulse frequency of 4 kHz and a speed range up to 5000 r/min

2) At a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz and speed range
• Forced ventilation (IP55)
– Shaft height 180 to 5000 r/min
– Shaft height 225 to 3500 r/min
– Shaft height 280 to 3300 r/min
• Open-circuit ventilation (IP23)
– Shaft height 180 to 3000 r/min
– Shaft height 225 to 2000 r/min
– Shaft height 280 to 2800 r/min

Note
Ambient air
If the ambient air is polluted by particles of dust or similar substances, the preferred air flow
direction is NDE → DE.
From shaft height 132 and higher, the motors with air flow direction NDE → DE are optionally
available with an air filter (option G14).

Cleaning the cooling air ducts

On air-cooled motors, you must regularly clean the cooling air ducts through which the ambient
air flows. The degree of pollution depends on the location of use. Clean the air cooling ducts, for
example, with dry, oil-free compressed air.

Motors with pipe connection

1PH8 motors with "Forced ventilation" and shaft heights 180...280 can optionally be ordered
with "pipe connection." The external fan, which is normally mounted as standard, is omitted in
this version. A molded pipe connection replaces the external fan.
The diameter of the pipe connection is based on the standard DIN EN 1506 or DIN EN 13180.
This means that commercially available pipes and molded parts for air-conditioning systems
can be used.

Note
Minimum air flow and pressure drop
Pipes and external fans of suitable type and dimensioning must be installed and connected. The
required minimum air flow and the pressure drop at the motor must be taken into account for
the design and dimensioning.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

72 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Table 4-6 Diameter, minimum air flow and pressure drop

Shaft height Diameter Degree of protection Minimum air quantity Pressure drop
mm mm m3/s Pa
180 300 IP23 0.21 450
IP55 0.17 550
225 350 IP23 0.33 600
IP55 0.31 650
280 Adapter required IP23 0.52 600
IP55 0.42 600

4.1.3 Water cooling

WARNING
Defective work on the cooling circuit
Defective work on the cooling circuit can cause injury and/or damage to property.
• Only qualified personnel may assemble, install, and commission the cooling circuit.
• Perform installation or service work on the cooling circuit only when the system is de-
energized.

The electrochemical processes that take place in a cooling system must be minimized by
choosing the right materials. For this reason, mixed installations, i.e. a combination of different
materials, such as copper, brass, iron, or halogenated plastic (PVC hoses and seals), should not
be used or should be limited to the absolutely essential minimum.
There are 3 types of cooling circuits:
• Closed cooling circuit
• Semi-open cooling circuit
• Open cooling circuit

Table 4-7 Description of the various cooling circuits

Definition Description
Closed cooling circuit The pressure equalizing vessel is closed (oxygen cannot enter the system)
and has a pressure relief valve. The coolant is only routed in the motors and
converters as well as the components required to dissipate heat.
Semi-open cooling circuit Oxygen can only enter the cooling system through the pressure equalization
vessel, otherwise the same as "closed cooling circuit."
Open cooling circuit (tow‐ The coolant is cooled in a tower. In this case, there is intensive oxygen con‐
er system) tact.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 73
Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Note
Cooling circuits
Only closed and semi-open cooling circuits are permissible for motors. Converter systems must
be connected before the motors in the cooling circuit.

 


 







1 Filter 1) 6 Temperature measurement

cooling water
2 Flow meter 1) 7 Compressor / cooling unit
3 Pressure relief valve, setting valve flow rate 1)
8 Cooling unit
4 Pump 9 Motor
5 Cooling water tank
1)
These components are not absolutely necessary.
Figure 4-1 Example of a semi-open cooling circuit

Equipotential bonding
Provide all components in the cooling system (motor, heat exchanger, piping system, pump,
pressure equalization tank, etc.) with equipotential bonding. Implement the equipotential
bonding using a copper rail or finely stranded copper cable with the appropriate conductor cross-
sections.

Note
Installation of the cooling water pipes
Electrically conductive cooling water pipes must not come into contact with live components.
• Ensure adequate insulation.
• Securely fasten the pipe.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

74 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Materials used in the motor cooling circuit

The materials used in the cooling circuit must be coordinated with the materials in the motor.

Table 4-8 Materials used in the cooling circuit of the 1PH8 motor

Shaft height Bearing shield Pipes in the stator (designa‐

tion)
80 Cast iron (EN-GJL-200) Stainless steel
100 Cast iron (EN-GJL-200) Stainless steel
132 Cast iron (EN-GJL-200) Stainless steel
160 Cast iron (EN-GJL-200) Stainless steel
180 - Stainless steel (V4A)
225 - Stainless steel (V4A)
280 - Stainless steel (V4A)

Materials and components in the cooling circuit

The following table lists a wide variety of materials and components which may or may not be
used in a cooling circuit.

Table 4-9 Materials and components of a cooling circuit

Material Used as Description

Zinc Pipes, valves and Use is not permitted.
fittings
Brass Pipes, valves and Can be used in closed circuits with inhibitor.
fittings
Copper Pipes, valves and Can be used only in closed circuits with inhibitors in which the heat
fittings sink and copper component are separated (e.g. connection hose
on devices).
Common steel (e.g. St37) Pipes Permissible in closed circuits and semi-open circuits with inhibitors
or Antifrogen N, check for oxide formation, inspection window
recommended.
Cast steel, cast iron Pipes, motors Closed circuit and use of strainers and flushback filters. Fe separator
for stainless heat sink.
High-alloy steel, Group 1 (V2A) Pipes, valves and Can be used for drinking or municipal water with a chloride content
fittings up to <250 ppm, suitable according to definition in Section "Cool‐
ant definition".
High-alloy steel, Group 2 (V4A) Pipes, valves and Can be used for drinking or municipal water with a chloride content
fittings up to <500 ppm, suitable according to definition in Section "Cool‐
ant definition".
ABS (AcrylnitrileButadieneStyrene) Pipes, valves and Suitable according to the definition in Section "Coolant definition".
fittings Suitable for mixing with inhibitor and/or biocide as well as Antifro‐
gen N.
Installation comprising different ma‐ Pipes, valves and Use is not permitted.
terials (mixed installation) fittings

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 75
Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Material Used as Description

PVC Pipes, valves, fit‐ Use is not permitted.
tings and hoses
Hoses Reduce the use of hoses to a minimum (device connection). Must
not be used as the main pipe for the whole system. Recommenda‐
tion: EPDM hoses with an electrical resistance > 109 Ω (e.g. Sem‐
perflex FKD supplied from Semperit or DEMITTEL; from PE/EPD,
supplied from Telle).
Gaskets Pipes, valves and Use of Viton, AFM34, EPDM is recommended.
fittings
Hose connections Transition Secure with clips conforming to DIN 2817, available e.g. from the
Hose - pipe Telle company.

The following recommendation applies in order to achieve an optimum motor heatsink

(enclosure) lifetime:
• Engineer a closed cooling circuit with cooling unit manufactured out of stainless steel that
dissipates the heat through a water-water heat exchanger.
• All other components such as cooling circuit cables and fittings manufactured out of ABS,
stainless steel or general construction steel.

Cooling system manufacturers

ait-deutschland GmbH www.kkt-chillers.com

BKW Kälte-Wärme-Versorgungstechnik GmbH www.bkw-kuema.de
DELTATHERM Hirmer GmbH www.deltatherm.de
Glen Dimplex Deutschland GmbH www.dimplex.de
Helmut Schimpke und Team Industriekühlanlagen www.schimpke.org
GmbH + Co. KG
Hydac System GmbH www.hydac.com
Hyfra Industriekühlanlagen GmbH www.hyfra.com
Pfannenberg GmbH www.pfannenberg.com

Note
Other manufacturers
You can also use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Responsibility for the properties of third-party products resides with the plant manufacturer.

Consider the following pressure conditions when designing the cooling circuit.

Permissible pressure
• Define the working pressure based on the flow conditions in the supply and return pipes of
the cooling circuit.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

76 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

The maximum permitted pressure in the cooling circuit is 0.6 MPa (6 bar).

Note
If you use a pump that reaches a higher pressure, maintain a maximum pressure of 0.6 MPa by
taking appropriate measures (pressure relief valve, pressure control, etc.).

• Design the cooling circuit to have the smallest possible pressure difference between the
supply and return pipes so that pumps with a shallow characteristic curve can be used.
• Design the cooling circuit with a self-cleaning filter to avoid blockage and corrosion.

Pressure drop in the motor


3+[
3UHVVXUHGURS>EDU@





 3+[




3+[





   
)ORZYROXPH>OPLQ@
Figure 4-2 Pressure drop in the cooling pipe system, shaft heights 80 to 132

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 77
Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling



3UHVVXUHGURS>EDU@



















     
)ORZYROXPH>OPLQ@
Figure 4-3 Pressure drop in the cooling pipe system, shaft height 160


3+
3UHVVXUHGURS>EDU@



3+





      
)ORZYROXPH>OPLQ@
Figure 4-4 Pressure drop in the cooling pipe system, shaft height 180



3UHVVXUHGURS>EDU@









       
)ORZYROXPH>OPLQ@
Figure 4-5 Pressure drop in the cooling pipe system, shaft height 225

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

78 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling





3UHVVXUHGURS>EDU@











        
)ORZYROXPH>OPLQ@
Figure 4-6 Pressure drop in the cooling pipe system, shaft height 280

Note
Ensuring adequate cooling
To ensure adequate cooling, comply with the minimum flow rates specified under Point "Cooling
data and sound pressure levels".

Pressure equalization
If various components are connected up in the cooling circuit, it may be necessary to provide
pressure equalization.

Note
Arrangement of the reactor element
Flow restrictors must be mounted on the cooling water outlet of the motor or the relevant
component!

Avoiding cavitation
During uninterrupted duty, the pressure drop across a converter or motor must not exceed
0.2 MPa (2 bar). Otherwise, the high flow rate results in damage due to cavitation and/or
abrasion.

Connecting motors in series

For the following reasons, Siemens only conditionally recommends connecting motors in series:
• The required flow rates of the motors must be approximately the same (< a factor of 2)
• An increase in the cooling water temperature can result in having to derate the second or
third motor if the maximum cooling water inlet temperature is exceeded.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 79
Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Cooling water inlet temperature

Note
Cooling water inlet temperature
Select the cooling water inlet temperature so that condensation does not form on the surface
of the motor.
Cooling water temperatures which are lower than the ambient temperature tend to result in
increased water condensation. The difference between the cooling water inlet temperature and
the ambient temperature depends on the relative air humidity. For instance, 50 % air humidity
at an ambient temperature of 40 °C corresponds to a temperature difference of 10 K:
Tcool > Tambient – temperature difference
Please note that you must also shut off the flow of cooling water when the motor is not
operational for prolonged periods of time.

The motors are designed for operation up to a cooling water inlet temperature of +30 °C,
provided that all of the specified motor data is complied with. If the cooling water inlet
temperature deviates from this, the continuous torque will change (see table "Derating
factors").

Table 4-10 Derating factors

Installation altitude above sea level Cooling water inlet temperature

m ≤ 30 °C 35 °C 40 °C 45 °C
1000 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.84
1500 0.97 0.92 0.87 0.81
2000 0.93 0.88 0.84 0.78
2500 0.91 0.86 0.82 0.76
3000 0.89 0.85 0.80 0.75
3500 0.87 0.83 0.78 0.73
4000 0.85 0.81 0.77 0.71

Cooling data and sound pressure levels

The specified values refer to operation at the rated speed with rated torque. The cooling water
temperature must be ≤ 30° C.

Table 4-11 Cooling data and sound pressure levels

Shaft height Flow Pressure drop Sound pressure level LpA (1 m) Thread con‐
rate, min. bar Motor rated load, nection at
l/min tolerance +3 dB NDE
dB Inch
80 6 0.6 68 1)
G 1/8
100 8 0.4 G 1/4
132 12 0.9 G 3/8
160 15 0.2 69 1) G1/2

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

80 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Shaft height Flow Pressure drop Sound pressure level LpA (1 m) Thread con‐
rate, min. bar Motor rated load, nection at
l/min tolerance +3 dB NDE
dB Inch
180 (1PH8184) 15 0.6 70 2) G 3/8
180 (1PH8186) 15 0.7 G3/8
225 (1PH822.-1) 20 0.6 G 3/8
(asynchronous)
225 (1PH822.-2) 25 0.9 70 3) G 3/8
(synchronous)
280 35 0.6 72 3) G 1/2

1) For a rated pulse frequency of 4 kHz and speed range up to 5000 r/min
2) For a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz or 4 kHz and speed ranges for
SH 180 of up to 5000 r/min
SH 225 up to 4500 r/min
3) For a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz and speed ranges for
SH 225 of up to 4500 per r/min
SH 280 up to 3300 r/min

Heat loss to be dissipated

The values for the heat loss to be dissipated are specified according to the rated point in Chapter
"Technical tables and characteristics."

Water specification

Cooling water quality

The values specified for the cooling water correspond to the requirements for a closed
cooling circuit. Not all specified concentrations will occur in the cooling water at the same
time.
A filter can be used to ensure smooth operation. The grade of filtration should be no less than
100 μm.

Cooling water inlet temperature

The maximum cooling water inlet temperature is 30 °C (86 °F)

Cooling water specifications

Table 4-12 Cooling water specifications (SH 80 to 160)

Component Quality of the water used as coolant for motors with stain‐
less steel pipes + cast iron or steel jacket
pH value 6 ... 9
Total hardness < 170 ppm
Electrical conductivity < 500 μS/cm
Chloride ions < 40 ppm, can be achieved by adding deionized water.
Sulfate ions < 50 ppm

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 81
Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Component Quality of the water used as coolant for motors with stain‐
less steel pipes + cast iron or steel jacket
Nitrate ions < 50 ppm
Dissolved solids < 340 ppm
Maximum particle size < 100 μm
Operating pressure < max. 6 bar
Pressure drop at V(N) < 1 bar
Inlet temperature < 30 °C
Anti-freeze protection / corrosion pro‐ 20 … 30 %
tection
NALCO 00GE056 inhibitor 0.2 ... 0.25%

Table 4-13 Cooling water specifications (SH 180 to 280)

Component Quality of the water used as coolant for motors with stain‐
less steel pipes
pH value 6 ... 9
Total hardness < 170 ppm
Electrical conductivity < 2000 μS/cm
Chloride ions < 250 ppm, can be obtained by adding deionized water.
Sulfate ions < 240 ppm
Nitrate ions < 50 ppm
Dissolved solids < 340 ppm
Maximum particle size < 100 μm
Operating pressure < max. 6 bar
Pressure drop at V(N) < 1 bar
Inlet temperature < 30 °C
Anti-freeze protection / corrosion pro‐ 20 … 30 %
tection
NALCO 00GE056 inhibitor 0.2 ... 0.25%

Note
Deionized water (for Cooling water specifications tables)
We recommend using deionized water with reduced conductivity (5 ... 10 µS/cm). If necessary,
ask your water utility to provide the values. According to 98/83/EC, drinking water may contain
up to 2500 ppm of chloride!
Manufacturers of chemical additives can provide support when analyzing the water that is
available on the plant side.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

82 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

Note
Inhibitor (for Cooling water specifications tables)
The inhibitor is not required if it ensured that the concentration of Antifrogen N is > 20%.
Derating is required for an anti-freeze content of > 30%

Biocide
The risk of corrosion caused by microbes is virtually non-existent in chlorinated drinking water
systems.
Closed cooling circuits with soft water are susceptible to microbes.
The following types of microbes are encountered in practice:
• Slime-forming bacteria
• Corrosive bacteria
• Iron-depositing bacteria
The suitability of a biocide depends on the type of microbe.
• Analyze the cooling water for microbes at least once a year.
Necessary biocides can be obtained from the manufacturer, e.g. Nalco. Ask the manufacturer
for compatibility with an inhibitor used in your system.
• Dose the biocide as recommended by the manufacturer.
Antifrogen N already acts like a biocide at the minimum concentration of > 20%.

Note
Compatibility of coolant additives
Biocides and Antifrogen N must not be mixed.

There are other manufacturers of chemical additives in the market. You can use equivalent
products from other manufacturers. Have the suitability of the third-party products
determined.

Other coolants (not water-based)

If you use different cooling media (e.g. oil, cooling lubricant), derating may be necessary in order
to comply with the thermal motor limit.

Note
Derating when using other cooling lubricants
Derating is required for water-oil mixtures with more than 10% oil.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 83
Mechanical properties
4.1 Cooling

To determine the derating, you need the following values of the coolant at a temperature of
30 °C:

Density ρ / kg/m3
Specific thermal capacitance cρ / J/(kg•K)
Thermal conductivity λ / W/(K•m)
Kinematic viscosity ν / m2/s
Flow rate V / l/min
The required derating can be obtained from Technical support.
Please send your enquiry to Technical support.

Manufacturers of chemical additives

Tyforop Chemie GmbH http://www.tyfo.de

Clariant Produkte Deutschland GmbH (Antifro‐ https://www.clariant.com
gen)
Cimcool Industrial Products Inc http://www.cimcool.net
FUCHS PETROLUB SE http://www.fuchs.com
Hebro Chemie GmbH http://www.hebro-chemie.de
HOUGHTON Deutschland GmbH http://www.houghton.com
Nalco Water in Germany http://www.nalco.com
(Ecolab)
Schweitzer-Chemie GmbH http://www.schweitzer-chemie.de

Information regarding third-party products

Note
Recommendation relating to third-party products
This document contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens accepts the
fundamental suitability of these third-party products.
You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third-party products.

Maintenance and service

Check the level and discoloration or turbidity of the cooling water at least once a year. In
addition, every year carefully check as to whether the cooling water still has the permissible
specification.
If cooling water has been lost, refill with a previously prepared mixture of deionized water
and inhibitor or Antifrogen N.
The motor is connected to the cooling circuit by means of two female threads on the rear of the
motor. Which one is the inlet and which one is the outlet can be freely connected.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

84 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.2 Degree of protection

Coolant connection: See table "Cooling data and sound pressure levels"
The units should be connected with hoses to provide mechanical decoupling (refer to the
table "Materials and components of a cooling circuit").

Commissioning
When required, before connecting the motors and converters to the cooling circuit, the pipes
should be flushed in order to avoid dirt entering the motors and converters.
After the units have been installed in the plant, the coolant circuit must be commissioned
before the electrical systems.

4.2 Degree of protection

Degree of protection designation

The degree of protection designation in accordance with EN 60034-5 (IEC 60034-5) is described
using the letters "IP" and two digits (e.g. IP64).
IP = International Protection
1st digit = protection against the ingress of foreign bodies
2nd digit = protection against water
When assigning motors to a specific degree of protection class, a standardized, brief test
procedure is applied. This can deviate significantly from the actual ambient conditions where
the motor is installed.
Attention must be paid to providing suitable sealing of the motor shaft for the selected
degree of protection for the motor.

Note
Suitability of the motor depending on the ambient conditions
Depending on these ambient conditions - such as the chemical properties of dusts or the cooling
media used at the installation site - it is only conditionally possible to evaluate the suitability of
the motor for the particular environment using the degree of protection (e.g. electrically
conductive dusts or aggressive coolant vapors or liquids).
In these cases, the motor must be additionally protected using the appropriate measures.

Note
Liquids that have collected and/or oil jets
Liquid must be prevented from collecting on the motor shaft as well as jets of oil (or are not
permissible at all) - even for versions with radial shaft sealing ring.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 85
Mechanical properties
4.2 Degree of protection

Degrees of protection
The degrees of protection which are available for the 1PH8 motor series are listed in the
following table.

Table 4-14 Description of degrees of protection

Motor Degree of 1st code number 2nd code number

protection
Touch protection Protection against ingress
of solid foreign bodies
Forced ventilation IP23 Protection against fin‐ Protection against medium- Protection against spray wa‐
(open-circuit ventila‐ ger contact sized, solid foreign bodies ter up to 60° from the vertical
tion) above 12 mm ∅
Forced ventilation (sur‐ IP55 Full protection Protection against damaging Splashwater from any direc‐
face cooling) against contact dust deposits tion
Water cooling IP65 Full protection Protection against dust Splashwater from any direc‐
against contact tion

Note
Routing cables in humid/moist environments
If the motor is mounted in a humid environment, the power and signal cables must be routed
as shown in the following figure.
6,(0(16

6,(0(16
6,(0(16

6,(0(16

6,(0(16
6,(0(16

ULFKWLJ SHUPLWWHG QLFKWHUODXEW QRWSHUPLWWHG

Figure 4-7 Principle of cable routing in a wet/moist environment

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

86 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.3 Construction types

4.3 Construction types

For correct motor selection, the following types of construction according to EN 60034-7 (IEC
60034‑7) apply:

Types of construction/Mounting positions Types of construction/Mounting positions

IM B3 IM B6

IM B7 IM B8

IM V6 IM V5

IM V35 1) IM V15 1)

IM B35 1) IM B5, IM B 14

IM V3, IM V19 IM V1, IM V18

1) Fixing on the flange and feet is necessary.

Figure 4-8 Types of construction

You will find the available types of construction in Chapter "Selection and ordering data."

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 87
Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

4.4 Types of bearing

4.4.1 Drive output types and bearing versions

1PH8 motors are suitable for coupling output and belt coupling. The bearing versions and their
applications are summarized in the following table.

Table 4-15 Drive output type with the appropriate bearing design

Application Bearing version

• Coupling output SH 80 to 160 SH 180 to 280
• Planetary gearboxes, low radial
forces

   
 

• Belt coupling with normal radial SH 100 to 160 SH 180 to 280

force
• Pinion output with
straight teeth
• Belt coupling with increased ra‐
dial force     
 

1)
Deep-groove ball bearing
2)
Cylindrical-roller bearings (only in versions for increased radial forces - 14th data position = E or F)
3)
For the bearing version G or H as a floating bearing (as for 1PH7); all other bearing types have a location bearing at the drive
end - 14th data position = A, B, C, D, F, L, M, P, Q, or N
4)
Version as a location bearing

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

88 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

Bearing version, maximum speed and bearing change intervals

Table 4-16 Bearing version, maximum speed and bearing change intervals

Shaft Bearing Maxi‐ Average Statistical Recommended Bearing type for

heigh design mum operating bearing bearing replacement in‐ condition monitoring
t speed speed service terval
nmax nm life tLW
r/min r/min L10h h
h Permanent‐ Re- DE NDE
ly lubrication
lubricated
80 Standard with 10,000 ≤ 8000 20,000 20,000 - 62207 62207
locating bear‐
ing
Standard 10,000 ≤ 6000 20,000 20,000 - 6207 6207
Performance 15,000 ≤ 11,500 12,000 12,000 - 62207 62207
High Perform‐ 20,000 ≤ 13,000 12,000 12,000 - 62207 62207
ance
Advanced Life‐ 5000 ≤ 3500 40,000 40,000 - 7205 7205
time
100 Standard with 9000 ≤ 7000 20,000 20,000 - 6308 62208
locating bear‐
ing
Standard 9000 ≤ 5000 20,000 20,000 - 6308 6208
Performance 12,000 ≤ 10,500 12,000 12,000 - 62208 62208
High Perform‐ 18,000 ≤ 11,500 12,000 12,000 - 62208 62208
ance
Advanced Life‐ 5000 ≤ 3000 40,000 40,000 - 62210 62208
time
Increased radi‐ 7000 ≤ 2300 20,000 20,000 - NU208 radial. 62208
al forces 6208 axial
132 Standard with 8000 ≤ 6500 20,000 20,000 - 6310 62210
locating bear‐
ing
Standard 8000 ≤ 4500 20,000 20,000 - 6310 6210
Performance 10,000 ≤ 8500 12,000 12,000 - 62210 62210
High Perform‐ 15,000 ≤ 10,000 12,000 12,000 - 62210 62210
ance
Advanced Life‐ 4500 ≤ 2500 40,000 40,000 - 62212 62210
time
Increased radi‐ 6500 ≤ 1800 20,000 20,000 - NU210 radial. 62210
al forces 6210 axial

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 89
Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

Shaft Bearing Maxi‐ Average Statistical Recommended Bearing type for

heigh design mum operating bearing bearing replacement in‐ condition monitoring
t speed speed service terval
nmax nm life tLW
r/min r/min L10h h
h Permanent‐ Re- DE NDE
ly lubrication
lubricated
160 Standard with 6500 ≤ 5400 20,000 20,000 - 6312 62212
locating bear‐
ing
Standard 6500 ≤ 3500 20,000 20,000 - 6312 6212
Performance 9000 ≤ 7000 12,000 12,000 - 62212 62212
High Perform‐ 10,000 ≤ 8000 12,000 12,000 - 62212 62212
ance
Advanced Life‐ 4000 ≤ 2300 40,000 40,000 - 62215 62212
time
Increased radi‐ 5300 ≤ 1500 16,000 16,000 - NU212 radial. 62212
al forces 6212 axial
180 Standard with 5000 ≤ 2000 40,000 20,000 40,000 6214-C3 6214-C3
locating bear‐ (3000)2) (24,000)1) (24,000)1)
ing
Increased radi‐ 5000 ≤ 2000 20,000 12,000 20,000 NU2214-ECP 6214-C3
al forces (3000)2) (12,000)1) (12,000)1)
Performance 7500 ≤ 5000 20,000 12,000 20,000 6214-M/C3 6214-
M/C3
225 Standard with 4500 ≤ 1800 40,000 20,000 40,000 6216-C3 6216-C3
locating bear‐ (2500)2) (24,000)1) (24,000)1) (insula‐
ing ted)
Increased radi‐ 4500 ≤ 1800 20,000 12,000 20,000 NU2216-ECP 6216-C3
al forces (2500)2) (12,000)1) (12,000)1) (insula‐
ted)
Performance 6000 ≤ 4000 20,000 12,000 20,000 6216-C3 6216-C3
(insula‐
ted)
280 Standard with 3300 ≤ 1500 40,000 20,000 40,000 6220-C3 6220-C3
locating bear‐ (2000)2) (24,000)1) (24,000)1) (insula‐
ing ted)
Increased radi‐ 3300 ≤ 1500 20,000 12,000 20,000 NU220-C3 6220-C3
al forces (2000)2) (12,000)1) (12,000)1) (insula‐
ted)
1)
When vertically mounted
2)
For types of construction IM V3, IM B5, and IM V1
You can calculate the average operating speed nm for alternating bearing load by the
following formula:

Q W   Q W   QL W L
QP


1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

90 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

Formula symbol Unit Description

t1 ... tn % Time percentage of the bearing load
n1 ... nn r/min Operating speed

You therefore calculate an average speed from the different speeds according to their time
percentages.

Table 4-17 Recommended bearing change intervals at maximum speed

Shaft height Bearing version Maximum Statistical Recommended bearing replacement in‐
speed bearing terval
service life tLW
nmax L10h h
r/min h Permanent lubrica‐ Relubrication
tion

80 Performance 15,000 8000 8000 -

High Performance 20,000 8000 8000 -
100 Performance 12,000 8000 8000 -
High Performance 18,000 8000 8000 -
132 Performance 10,000 8000 8000 -
High Performance 15,000 8000 8000 -
160 Performance 9000 8000 8000 -
High Performance 10,000 8000 8000 -

Table 4-18 "Premium Performance" bearing version, maximum speed and bearing change intervals

Shaft height Maximum speed Average operating speed Recommended bearing replace‐
nmax nm ment interval
r/min r/min tLW
h
with sealing air without seal‐
(Option Q12) ing air

80 24,000 < 16,000 12,000

< 19,200* 10,000 8000
24,000 7000 4000

Speed backlash with:

t1 = 10 min, n1 = 0
t2 = 30 min, n2 = 16,000 r/min
t3 = 60 min, n3 = 24,000 r/min

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 91
Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

Note
Difficult operating conditions in operation at nmax
Under difficult operating conditions, the bearing replacement intervals tLW are reduced by up to
50 %.
Difficult operating conditions include
• large vibrations and shocks
• frequent reversing operation

Note
Reduced maximum motor speeds
The maximum speeds might be reduced on motors with integrated encoder as a result of
mechanical conditions or limitations imposed by signal conditioning capacity.
The reduced maximum speeds can be found in the table "Encoder types for motors with DRIVE-
CLiQ" in Chapter Encoder assignment as a function of maximum permissible speeds (Page 162).

Note
Permanently switching on the sealing air
For the "Premium Performance" bearing version, Siemens recommends that the sealing air be
permanently switched on during continuous operation at nmax. Sealing air connection and
conditioning are described in Chapter "Sealing air connection (option Q12) (Page 171)."

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

92 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

4.4.2 Bearing lifetime

The bearing lifetime is limited by material fatigue (fatigue service life) and/or lubrication failure
(grease service life). The fatigue lifetime (statistical bearing lifetime L10h) mainly depends the
mechanical load. The correlation is shown in the radial force/axial force diagrams. The values are
determined according to DIN/ISO 281.
The grease lifetime is mainly dependent on the bearing size, speed, temperature as well as
the vibrational load.
The grease lifetime can be extended by especially favorable operating conditions (low or
average speed, low bearing temperatures, low radial force or vibration load).
A reduction of the grease lifetime can be expected for difficult operating conditions and
when motors are mounted vertically.

Lifetime lubrication (without relubrication)

Note
For lifetime lubrication, the grease lifetime is harmonized with the bearing lifetime L10h.

Bearing change interval (tLW)

The recommended bearing change intervals are obtained from the inter-dependencies
mentioned above for a specific operating point such as:
• Coupling output or belt coupling
• Coolant temperature up to max. +40 °C (forced ventilation)
• Cooling water inlet temperature up to max. +30 °C (water cooling)
• Complying with the permissible radial and axial forces (refer to Chapter "Radial and axial
forces")

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 93
Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

• Complying with the maximum permissible speeds (refer to Chapter "Technical data and
characteristics")
• The bearing change intervals are reduced for unfavorable operating conditions, for example
– average speed > than the value specified in Table 4-16
– continuous operation at nmax
– Vibration and shock load
– Frequent reversing operation
Note
Replacing the motor bearings
When replacing the motor bearings, we also recommend that encoders with their own
bearings are also replaced.
The fatigue life and the grease consumption time are calculated, statistical values and
cannot be warranted.

Note
Axial bearing loads for vertical mounting
The increased axial loads imposed on the bearings on vertically mounted motors can
reduce the bearing lifetime by almost 50%. This applies to shaft heights 180 to 280 due
to the rotor weights.

Relubrication
In motors that can be relubricated, the bearing life can be extended by complying with fixed
relubrication intervals.
Depending on the frame size, some restrictions have to be taken into account - e.g. vertical
mounting/shaft position.
It is possible to relubricate motors, shaft heights 180 and 225. A lubricating nipple is
optionally provided, Code K40.

Relubrication intervals
Relubrication intervals are specified:
• on the lubrication plate of the motor
• in the table "Relubrication intervals"
Note
Longer time periods between delivering and commissioning the motor
For longer periods of time (e.g. longer than 1 relubrication interval) between shipping and
commissioning the motor, the bearings must be lubricated. When relubricating, the shaft
must be rotated in order to distribute the grease around the bearings (for additional
information, see the Operating Instructions).

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

94 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

The values specified in the table below apply to the same conditions as are described above
for bearing change intervals:

Table 4-19 Relubrication intervals

Shaft Bearing version Relubrication inter‐ Quantity of grease Grease cham‐ Possible number of
height val in operating for each relubrica‐ ber2) relubrication inter‐
hours4) tion operation1) g vals3)
h g
180 Standard 7000 15 80 5
Increased radial 4000 20 80 4
forces
Performance 4000 15 80 5
225 Standard 7000 30 180 6
Increased radial 4000 40 180 4
forces
Performance 4000 30 180 6
280 Standard 7000 40 400 10
Increased radial 4000 50 400 8
forces
1)
Grease quantity for relubrication for normal conditions (ambient temperature up to 40°C, horizontal mounting.
2)
Holding capacity of the grease chamber with precise adherence to the grease quantity for each relubrication interval.
3)
Calculated number of re-lubricating intervals; the bearing lifetime is specified statistically by means of the L10h definition.
4)
Relubricating intervals must be halved for vertically mounted units.

Note
Adapting relubricating intervals
Unfavorable factors such as the effects of mounting/installation, speed or mechanical loads
require that the relubricating intervals are appropriately adapted. Situations such as these
require special consideration or must be calculated - and must be engineered according to the
limitations and constraints together with the responsible motor plant.
The increased axial loads imposed on the bearings on vertically mounted motors can reduce the
bearing lifetime by almost 50%. This applies to shaft heights 180 to 280 due to the rotor weights.
A check which takes into account the relevant boundary conditions must be performed on SH
280 in the relevant motor factory.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 95
Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

4.4.3 NDE bearing with insulated shaft (option L27)

Relevant, additional bearing currents

When compared to a pure sinusoidal supply, the pulsed output voltage of a frequency converter
results in additional motor bearing currents. The relevant additional bearing currents are:
• Circulating currents
• EDM currents
• Rotor ground currents

Factors that influence bearing currents

Above a certain magnitude, bearing currents result in localized melting at the bearing rings and
rolling assemblies as well as lubricant wear. This reduces the bearing lifetime. Essential
influencing factors include:
• Motor speed and associated operating time
• Pulse frequency of the frequency converter
• Grounding relationships between the motor and the connected load

Application for option L27

At speeds 500 r/min, the load due to bearing currents increases significantly. Option L27 is
always required if the motor is operated in the speed range between 0 ... 500 r/min for a longer
period of time. Without option L27, the total operating time in the speed range 0 ... 500 r/min
may be a maximum of 800 h (for an assumed bearing change interval (tLW) of the bearings of
20,000 h).

Table 4-20 Measures that are required for operation in the speed range < 500 r/min

Shaft height Bearing change interval (tLW) for lifetime Options that Comment
lubrication are required
h 1)
80 - 160 - Due to the experience from the
field (in practice) no dangers have
been identified due to bearing cur‐
20,000 rents
180 L27 NDE bearing with insulated shaft
225 - Always NDE bearing with insulated
shaft
280 - Always NDE bearing with insulated
shaft

1) Definition, refer to the table "Recommended bearing change intervals"

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

96 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.4 Types of bearing

Motor grounding
In order to avoid rotor ground currents, the motor frame should be well grounded - e.g. by using
shielded motor cables. The motor cable shield should be connected at both ends through the
largest possible surface area.
For specific applications, the grounding of the motor Zhg can be more unfavorable than the
grounding of the connected loads Zrg, e.g. for long motor cables and when the motor is
mounted in an insulated fashion. In this case, the capacitive discharge (leakage) current of
the motor flows from the motor frame through the motor shaft to the connected load and
from there to ground.

0RWRU *HDUER[

&RQFUHWH =KJ
IRXQGDWLRQ =UJ 

5HIHUHQFHJURXQG
Figure 4-9 Bearing current due to the grounding situation (=rotor ground current)

The rotor ground current should be avoided by using an electrically insulating coupling. If
such a coupling cannot be used for mechanical reasons, then the motor frame must be
connected to the load through the largest possible surface area. The capacitive discharge
(leakage) current then flows from the motor frame to the load and not through the bearings.
The connection between the motor frame and load is only effective if it represents an
extremely low impedance for the high-frequency discharge (leakage) current. To achieve this,
use several flat straps, e.g. grounding straps, metal plates.

0RWRU *HDUER[

&RQFUHWH =KJ
IRXQGDWLRQ =UJ 

5HIHUHQFHJURXQG
Figure 4-10 Connection between the motor frame and load to avoid rotor ground currents

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 97
Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

4.5 Shaft end

The DE shaft end is cylindrical in accordance with DIN 748 Part 3 (IEC 60072-1).

4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

General information
1PH8 main motors with a hollow shaft (13th position in the Article No.: " 3 ") are designed as
main spindle motors for machine tools and machining centers with internal tool cooling. A
rotating union is required for the provision of the coolant in the rotating motor shaft. A rotor-
supported or, for a motor ordered with option Y64, a bearingless, frame-supported rotating
union can be mounted on the NDE shaft extension. In addition to coolant, suitable rotating
unions can also transfer oil mist (minimum quantity lubrication), cutting oils or even
compressed air at standstill.
Rotor-supported rotating unions consist of the following components:
• Rotor with bearing
• Stator
• Enclosure with cable connections
• Floating-ring shaft seal
Rotor-supported rotating unions are easy to fit and change. They are screwed into the motor
shaft via the thread on the rotor. The advantage of these rotating unions is the leading off of
the leakage via the housing and the integrated leakage connection.
Bearingless, frame-supported rotating unions are made up of two separate parts, the rotating
part with a mechanical seal and the static part with a mechanical seal and supply connection.
By eliminating the bearings, higher speeds can be achieved and the rotating union is less
sensitive to vibrations and lateral loads. However, an adapter such as is described in Ch.
"Suggestion for an adapter for bearingless, frame-supported rotating unions" for installing
the rotating union is required.
Installation must be performed very carefully because the sealing surfaces of the mechanical
seal are not protected.
The rotating part is bolted into the NDE end of the motor shaft. The static part is mounted
on the encoder cover of the motor via an adapter. The adapter must include a facility for
draining leakage. The adapter must be designed in such a way that the motor is not flooded
by the leakage and the degree of protection of the motor is complied with. It may be
necessary to use sealing air.
For use of a bearingless rotating union, the motor must be ordered with option Y64 and the
interface on the encoder cover must be located concentrically with respect to the shaft. The
mounting conditions stated by the manufacturer of the rotating union must be met.
Depending on the type of rotating unions, the sealing rings may be permanently or
temporarily in contact.
Example of a closed seal: DEUBLIN series 1116 and 1108
Example of an opening seal: DEUBLIN series 902 and 1109

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

98 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

With opening seals, the sealing surfaces are separated when there is no coolant pressure,
e.g. during a tool change. In this case, coolant runs out of the supply line and out of the
motor shaft through the opened seal. This leakage and also the leakage due to wear of the
sealing rings must be guided away via the leakage lines.

NOTICE
Motor failure due to incorrectly mounted leakage line
If the leakage line does not lead downward, the leakage can flood the rotating union and the
motor. This can result in failure of the rotating union and motor.
To ensure the leakage is led away, the leakage line must always lead downward so that nothing
can flow back.
• When mounting, ensure that the leakage line always leads downward.

NOTICE
Axial forces due to coolant pressure
Coolant under high pressure (usually 40 to 90 bar) flows via the mounted rotating union
through the sequence of holes in the drive train:
• Rotating union
• Motor
• Spindle
• Tool.
Due to the different hole diameters and the gap, different cross sections (areas) occur along the
coolant flow, which can produce axial forces due to the coolant pressure. These can be 4 to 12.7
N/mm2, depending on the coolant pressure.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 99
Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors


 
˭™ 'Y GY 
)Y   ™S

IRUEHDULQJOHVVIUDPHVXSSRUWHGURWDWLQJXQLRQ


) 
IRUURWRUVXSSRUWHGURWDWLQJXQLRQ

ෙ )D[ )Yದ)
7KLVD[LDOIRUFHPXVWEHDGGHGWRRUVXEWUDFWHGIURP)F

 
˭™ ' G
) ™S


Figure 4-11 Mounting the rotating union

Figure "Mounting the rotating union," illustrates how an axial force arises due to joint
pressure, for example, in the gap between the motor shaft (hole bolt) and the spindle shaft.
This acts upon the motor shaft against the bearing preloading force Fc. This reduces or even
eliminates the preloading force of the motor bearing.
For bearingless, frame-supported rotating unions, axial forces can also arise depending on
the internal differing hole diameters. These act against the forces from the joint, so they
have a smaller effect on the bearing preloading force. Ensure that the axial forces from the
rotating union are greater than those from the joint (see case 1 in the graphic). This has
the advantage that the bearing preloading force remains unchanged. The bearing preloading
force is important for non-slip running of the motor bearing and must not be eliminated.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

100 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

This advantage does not apply to rotor-supported rotating unions. It is important to ensure
that the preloading force of the motor bearing is not eliminated (see figure "Mounting the
rotating union" case 2). The axial force toward the motor must not be in the interval FAZ =
Fc +/- 25% for horizontally mounted motors and FAZ = (Fc +/-25%) + FL for vertically mounted
motors with the shaft extension pointing downward. For maximum permissible axial forces
at the shaft extension, the specifications stated in Chapter "Radial and axial forces" apply. The
axial forces that act in the rotating union must be requested from the manufacturer.

Hollow shaft version

Table 4-21 Hollow shaft version

1PH808☐ 1PH810☐ ... 1PH816☐

Thread on DE M12 x 1.25-RH M16 x 1.5-RH
Centering on DE ∅16H7 ∅20H7
Thread on NDE M12 x 1.25-LH M16 x 1.5-LH
Centering on NDE ∅14 +0.008/+0.001 ∅18 +0.007/-0.003
Through-hole ∅8 ∅11.5
Key surface NDE SW19 SW27

4.6.1 Rotor-supported rotating union

NOTICE
Leaks in the rotating union
If there are leaks in the rotating union and the hoses, the motor may be flooded and fail!
• Avoid leaks in the rotating union.

Note the following points when mounting the rotating union:

• When you mount the rotating union, pay attention to special aspects that differ between air-
cooled and water-cooled motors.
• When installing the rotating union, observe the manufacturer’s data.

Mounting on water-cooled motors

Water-cooled motors have a “2” in the 11th position in the Article No. With water-cooled motors,
you can mount the rotating union directly on the motor. Use rotating unions with radial or axial
connections.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 101
Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

Mounting rotor-supported rotating union on water-cooled motors

① Sealing cover
② Balancing disk
③ Rotor-supported rotating union, e.g. DEUBLIN 1109-020-188
④ Leakage hose
⑤ Inlet hose

Mounting on air-cooled motors

Air-cooled motors have a “0” or a “1” in the 11th position of the Article No. Air-cooled motors are
equipped with an intermediate housing between the motor and the axially mounted fan. The
intermediate housing is used to accommodate the rotating union.
The intermediate housing is suitable for rotating unions with the following dimensions:
• Length up to 120 mm (without rotor connection thread and centering)
• Diameter up to 55 mm

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

102 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

Due to limitations of space, rotating unions with radial connections are advisable for air-
cooled motors, e.g. DEUBLIN 1109-020-188.
Rotating unions with axial connections are not suitable!

Mounting rotor-supported rotating unions on air-cooled motors

ཱི ཷ

ྲྀ
ཱུ

ི
ཱ
཰ ུ

① Sealing cover
② Balancing disk
③ Intermediate housing
④ Rotor-supported rotating union, e.g. DEUBLIN 1109-020-188
⑤ Cutout
⑥ Cover (openings for connections must be closed again)
⑦ Leakage hose
⑧ Inlet hose
⑨ Fan

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 103
Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

Note
When air-cooled motors are connected, only rotating unions with a radial connection are used.

Mounting steps



Note
Mounting steps for air-cooled motors
The mounting steps 1, 11, 12, 13, and 14 are only required for air-cooled motors.

1. Remove the fan and intermediate housing from the motor.

2. If necessary, perform complete balancing of the motor using the exterior balancing disks. To
do this, remove the sealing cover.
Note
Sealing cover
• Remount the sealing cover after balancing.
• The sealing cover is required to comply with the degree of protection.

3. Attach hoses for the inlet and leakage to the rotating union. Use angle elements if necessary.
Note
Rotating union to be used
• Use a rotating union with radial connections.

4. Screw the rotating union into the NDE motor shaft extension. Tighten the rotating union with
the correct tightening torque. For this, use the wrench grip surface on the NDE motor shaft
extension to hold the other side.
5. Position the rotating union horizontally in such a way that the leakage connection is at the
lowest point.
6. Always connect the hose for leakage sloping downward at least 15°.
7. Also connect the hose for the inlet sloping downward.
8. If necessary, provide a ventilation hose for the leakage chamber. It equalizes the negative
pressure caused by the fan. Lead the ventilation hose upward.
9. Manually check that the rotor turns easily.
10.Test the mounting under pressure for leaks.
11.Make a burr-free cutout in the intermediate housing for the inlet and leakage hoses.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

104 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

12.Push the intermediate housing with the cutout over the hoses. Screw the intermediate
housing onto the motor. Protect the hoses from mechanical stresses.
13.Screw the fan onto the intermediate housing.
14.Seal the remaining openings between the cutout and the hoses.

4.6.2 Bearingless, frame-supported rotating union

The bearingless frame-supported rotating union cannot be mounted directly on the motor. An
adapter is required for the static part of the rotating union. The adapter is not included in the
scope of delivery and must be made by the customer to match the rotating union to be used.
Carefully comply with the design notes:
• Match the adapter to hold the static part to the rotating union to be used. To do this, carefully
comply with the dimensions of the manufacturer of the rotating union. Implement the
adapter as shown in Chapter "Suggestion for an adapter for bearingless, frame-supported
rotating unions".
• The gap between the adapter and the NDE shaft extension must be as small as possible in the
radial direction (approx. 0.25 mm) and be as long as possible in the axial direction so that
coolant that escapes cannot enter the motor. The leakage connections must be as large as
possible and must be provided at the lowest point in the leakage chamber. The leakage
connection (G3/8") located nearest the static part of the rotating union is for draining leakage
away during operation. The second leakage connection (G1/4") is a backup for draining away
increased leakage due to faults.

NOTICE
Monitoring the backup line
Monitor the flow rate of the backup line to detect any faults in the rotating union in good time,
and to protect the motor from flooding.
• Make sure that a signal is output in the event of leakage.
• Make sure that the system (coolant supply) is switched off in case of a fault.

• Implement the star-shaped drainage openings in the mounting surface to the encoder cover
as shown in Chapter "Suggestion for an adapter for bearingless, frame-supported rotating
unions" so that liquid cannot penetrate the motor through the labyrinth seal between the
encoder cover and the balancing disk. If the motor is mounted vertically, all 6 drainage holes
should be opened; if the motor is mounted horizontally, it is enough to open the two lower
drainage holes.

Note
Provide a sealing air connection to protect the motor against the penetration of coolant.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 105
Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

• The diameters and end faces of the adapter for supporting the encoder cover or the static
part of the rotating union should be turned in one clamping if possible. For simpler
machining, the adapter can be axially split. It is important that the finish-machining of the
support diameter and end faces is performed in the assembled condition and in one
clamping.

Mounting on water-cooled motors

Water-cooled motors have a “2” in the 11th position of Article No. together with option Y64.
Use rotating unions with radial or axial connections.

Mounting a bearingless rotating union on a water-cooled motor

ཱུ ླྀ

ཷ
ི
ཱི
ཱ

1 Encoder cover
2 Balancing disk
3 Adapter
4 6 x M5 bolts
5 Rotating part of the rotating union, e.g. DEUBLIN 1129-050-301
6 Static part of the rotating union, e.g. DEUBLIN 1129-050-301
7 Leakage hose (min. internal diam. 12 mm)
8 Leakage hose as backup and for faults
9 Inlet hose
10 Sealing air connection

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

106 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

Mounting on air-cooled motors

Air-cooled motors have a “0” or a “1” in the 11th position of Article No. together with option Y64.
Air-cooled motors are equipped with an intermediate housing between the motor and the
axially mounted fan. The intermediate housing is used to accommodate the rotating union.
It is suitable for rotary glands up to a length (without rotor connection thread and centering)
of 120 mm and a diameter of up to 55 mm. Due to space limitations, rotating unions with
radial connections are recommended for air-cooled motors, e.g. DEUBLIN 1129-050-301.
Rotating unions with axial connections are also possible in short versions, e.g. DEUBLIN
1129-730-731. In this case, a bracket must be used at the axial connection to which the
supply hose is connected. The 120 mm dimension must not be exceeded when a bracket is
used.

NOTICE
Sealing the remaining holes
Seal the remaining holes again between the cutout and the hoses to ensure that motor cooling
is still effective.

Mounting of bearingless rotating union on an air-cooled motor

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 107
Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

ཱུ
ླྀ
PD[

ྲྀ
ུ

ི
ཱ
ཷ
ཱི

ོ
཰
ཻ

1 Encoder cover 8 Leakage hose as backup and for faults

2 Balancing disk 9 Inlet hose
3 Adapter 10 Sealing air connection
4 6 x M5 bolts 11 Intermediate housing
5 Rotating part of the rotating union, e.g. DEU‐ 12 Cutout
BLIN 1129-050-301
6 Static part of the rotating union, e.g. DEUBLIN 13 Cover (reclose the openings for the connec‐
1129-050-301 tions)
7 Leakage hose (min. internal diam. 12 mm) 14 Fan

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

108 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

Mounting steps



Note
Mounting steps for air-cooled motors
The mounting steps 1, 13, 14, 15, and 16 are only required for air-cooled motors.

1. Disassemble the fan and intermediate housing from the the motor.
2. Removing the sealing cover
3. If necessary, perform complete balancing of the motor with external balancing disks
4. Screw the rotating part of the rotating union into the NDE motor shaft extension and tighten
with the appropriate torque (against the wrench grip surface on the NDE motor shaft
extension).
5. Mount the adapter for the static part (not included in the scope of delivery) on the encoder
cover with 6x M5 screws. Position the adapter in such a way that the leakage connection is
at the lowest point (with horizontal mounting).
6. Mount the hoses for leakage and sealing air on the adapter, if necessary using angled
elements
7. Mount the hose for the supply to the static part of the rotating union, if necessary using
angled elements
8. Screw the static part onto the adapter
9. Always connect the hoses for leakage sloping downward (min. 15°).
10.Also connect the hose for the inlet sloping downward.
11.Manually check that the rotor turns easily.
12.Perform a hydrostatic test for leaks
13.Make a cutout for the inlet and leakage hoses in the intermediate housing.
14.Push the intermediate housing with the inlet over the hoses and screw it to the motor. Protect
the hoses from mechanical loads
15.Screw the fan on to the intermediate housing
16.Seal the remaining openings between the cutout and the hoses

4.6.3 Mounting information and instructions

• Do not mount any additional anti-rotation pins on rotor-supported rotating unions
• Never screw pipes directly to the rotating union.
• Always use a hose between the rotating union and the fixed piping. To do this, route the
hoses in curves and torsion-free.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 109
Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

• First screw the flexible hoses onto the rotor-supported rotating union. Then screw the
rotating union onto the shaft with the specified torque.
• Avoid stressing due to incorrect hose lengths and unsuitable mounting material.
• The rotating union must be easy to turn when mounted.
• Keep rotating unions free of chips and burrs.
• Position the rotating union horizontally in such a way that the leakage connection is at the
lowest point.
• Always route the leakage hose downward at at least 15° with a large cross-section.
• If the leakage hose is higher than the leakage connection and the mechanical seal is open,
the rotating union and possibly also the motor will be flooded. The motor can fail.
• Also route the inlet hose downward. This causes the coolant to flow back in the supply line
when the mechanical seal is open (e.g. tool change or standstill) and not through the motor
shaft and the leakage connection.
• Filter the coolant so that no particles or chips can reach the mechanical seal and damage it.
Note
Mounting the rotating union
• During assembly, screw the thread absolutely tightly into the NDE shaft extension. Ensure
that no coolant can leak.

• Check the rotating union and hoses regularly for tightness.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

110 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

Intermediate housing for air-cooled motors

$
%

&

PD[
'PD[


① Cutout for hoses (to be made by the customer)

② Motor side
③ Fan side

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 111
Mechanical properties
4.6 Mounting of rotating unions on 1PH8 hollow-shaft motors

Slot dimensions for the intermediate housing

SH 80 SH100 SH132 SH160

A 155 196 260 314
B 99 133 183 225
C 6 6 7 7
R 16 16 19 19
D 170 185 175 180

4.6.4 Suggestion for an adapter for bearingless, frame-supported rotating unions

Note
Comply with the manufacturer's specifications
Comply with the specifications and instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing
the rotating union.

Figure 4-12 Example of the version of an adapter for supporting the static part of a bearingless, frame-supported rotating
union

1PH808. 1PH810.-1PH816.
Diameter D1 Diam. 22.5 H7 Diam. 30.5 H7

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

112 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

4.7 Radial and axial forces

4.7.1 Radial force

Do not exceed specific radial forces in order to guarantee perfect operation.
Never exceed the minimum force for any of the different shaft heights. This minimum force is
indicated in the radial force diagrams. The diagrams show the radial force FR
• At various operating speeds
• As a function of the bearing lifetime
The force diagrams and tables apply to standard shaft ends at the DE. For smaller shaft
diameters, only reduced radial forces may be transmitted or none at all.
For force levels going beyond these, contact your local sales partner.

NOTICE
Premature damage to bearings and shaft breakage due to strong radial forces
Bearings can be prematurely damaged and shafts may break if force transmission elements
apply too much load to the shaft end as a result of radial forces.
• When using mechanical transmission elements, ensure that the maximum limit values
specified in the radial force diagrams are not exceeded.

NOTICE
Premature damage to bearings due to insufficient radial forces
Only for bearings with increased radial force (shaft height 100 to 280):
Insufficiently high radial forces can cause the bearings to roll in an undefined fashion. This
results in increased bearing wear.
• For applications with an extremely low radial force load, ensure that the motor shaft is
subject to at least the minimum radial force specified in the diagrams.
Where the radial force load is less than the minimum radial force, e.g. on a coupling drive,
you must not use the bearings for increased radial force. Use a motor with standard bearings
for these applications.

NOTICE
Destruction of bearing seats
The motor bearings are designed for operation with radial force. Rotating forces from the
process or imbalance > Q 2.5 can destroy the bearing seats. Rotating forces and imbalance can
also occur on coupling drives.
• Avoid rotating forces and imbalance.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 113
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

NOTICE
Mechanical destruction of the motor
If the motor supports the higher forces when force/torque boosting elements are used, the
flange or the feet of the motor, for example, can be torn off.
• Make sure that the force/torque boosting elements, e.g. gearbox or brakes, absorb the
greater forces.
Examples of remedies:
– Choose the correct type of construction.
– Pay attention to correct mechanical mounting of the force/torque boosting elements.

Note
Complying with the belt manufacturer's guidelines
• When dimensioning the radial forces at the shaft extension, ensure that you comply with the
regulations of the belt manufacturers.
• Set the belt tension by means of appropriate measuring instruments.

Calculating the total radial force FR for belt couplings

If the belt manufacturer has not provided precise radial force data, the radial force can be
approximately determined using the following formula:

FR [N] = c ∙ FU FU [N] = 2 ∙ 107 ∙ P / (n ∙ D)

Table 4-22 Explanation of the formula abbreviations

Formula ab‐ Unit Description

breviations
c -- Pre-tensioning factor: The pre-tensioning factor is an experience value pro‐
vided by the belt manufacturer. Values as follows:
• V-belt: c = 1.5 to 2.5
• Special plastic belts (flat belts), depending on the load type and belt type
c = 2.0 to 2.5
FU N Circumferential force
P kW Motor output
n r/min Motor speed
D mm Diameter of belt pulley

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

114 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

4.7.2 Axial force

The axial force acting on the locating bearings comprises the following components:

- Axial force in operation

• Axial forces acting externally on the motor (e.g. gearbox with helical gearing, machining
forces through the tool)
• Axial forces from the coolant pressure of the coolant fed through the rotating union

- Force due to spring loading of the bearing

- Where applicable, force exerted by the rotor weight when the motor is vertically
mounted
This results in a maximum axial force that is a function of the direction.

CAUTION
Axial force due to effective hydraulic diameter of the rotating union
Pay attention to the axial force due to the effective hydraulic diameter (area) of the rotating
union.
Force = A x p
• Force = F [N]
• A = area [m²]
• p = coolant pressure [N/m²]
1 bar = 105 N/m²

For axial forces in the direction of the motor, the spring-loading of the bearings can be
overcome so that the rotor moves in accordance with the axial bearing play (up to 0.2mm).
The permissible axial force FAZ in operation depends on the motor mounting position.
When, for example, helical toothed wheels are used as the drive element, an axial force is
exerted on the motor bearings in addition to the radial force. For axial forces in the direction
of the motor, the spring-loading of the bearing can be overcome. This must be prevented as
otherwise it could reduce the bearing and encoder service life.
The permissible axial force FAZ in operation depends on the motor mounting position (see
table "Calculating the permissible axial force").

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 115
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Table 4-23 Calculating the permissible axial force

Horizontal arrangement Shaft end facing downwards Shaft end facing upwards
SH 80 - SH 160 with bearing version Standard with locating bearing, Performance, High Performance, Advanced Lifetime

)$=  )$= )$=

)$= )$  )&

)$=
)$= )$=

)$= )& )$ )$= )$  ) /  ) & )$= ) /  ) &  ) $ )$= )$ ) /  ) & )$= ) &  ) /  ) $

SH 80 - SH 160 with bearing version Standard

)$=  )$= )$=

)$= )$  )&

)$=
)$= )$=

)$= )& )$= )$  ) /  ) & )$= ) /  ) & )$= )$ ) /  ) & )$= ) &  ) /

SH 180 and SH 225

)$=  )$= )$=

)$= )$ )&

)$=
)$= )$=

)$= )$ ) &  ) / )$= ) $  ) &  ) / )$= )$ ) & ) / )$= ) $  ) /  ) &
)$= )$  )&

SH 280

)$=  )$= )$=

)$= )$  )&

)$=
)$= )$=

)$= )& )$ )$= )$  ) /  ) & )$= ) /  ) &  ) $ )$= )$ ) /  ) & )$= ) &  ) /  ) $

FAZ Permissible axial force in operation

FA Permissible axial force as a function of the average operating speed nm in each case,
ignoring the preloading force and the force due to the weight of the rotor
FC Pre-loading force
FL Force due to weight of rotor

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

116 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

4.7.3 Permissible radial and axial forces for 1PH808 Premium Performance
For the Premium Performance version of the 1PH808, the following radial and axial forces of the
motor shaft are permissible:

Radial force = 100 N Axial force = 1400 N

The axial force address comprises:
Rotating union = 950 N Preloading Fc = 450 N

Maximum permissible mechanical load

DE shaft extension NDE shaft extension

Maximum radial force 100 N 100 N
Maximum radial force Solid shaft
1 Toward the motor 350 N -
2 Away from the motor 950 N -
Hollow shaft
1 Toward the motor 350 N 950 N
2 Away from the motor 950 N 350 N

4.7.4 Radial and axial force diagrams

Permissible radial forces for SH 80

>N1@
Q>USP@
 
)
5
)
5

[ 

 


 

   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-13 SH 80, Standard, and Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 117
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5 
[  

 


 

   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-14 SH 80, Performance, High Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5
[  

 




   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-15 SH 80, Advanced Lifetime, 40,000 h bearing lifetime

Permissible radial forces for SH 100

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5 
)
5
[  

 

 


   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-16 SH 100, Standard, and Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

118 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

5DGLDOIRUFHFKDUW,QWRWDO

5DGLDOIRUFH)1
R

'LVWDQFH[PP

Figure 4-17 SH 100, increased radial force, 20,000 h bearing lifetime, minimum radial force: 0.5 kN

Note
Bearing with increased radial force
The roller bearings used here could sustain damage if they are operated under no load.
Observe the specified minimum radial forces!

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5

[ 




 


   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-18 SH 100, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5

[ 

 

 



   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-19 SH 100, High Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 119
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5
[  




 

   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-20 SH 100, Advanced Lifetime, 40,000 h bearing lifetime

Permissible radial forces for SH 132

>N1@
=XO¦VVLJH%HODVWXQJVJUHQ]H
Q>USP@
 I¾U:HOOHQHQGH[
)
5 SHUPLVVLEOHORDGOLPLWIRU
)
5
[ VKDIWHQG[
 
 RSWLRQ9

 


 

    >PP@
[
Figure 4-21 SH 132, Standard, and Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

5DGLDOIRUFHFKDUW,QWRWDO
5DGLDOIRUFH)1
R

'LVWDQFH[PP

Figure 4-22 SH 132, increased radial force, 20,000 h bearing lifetime, minimum radial force: 0.7 kN

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

120 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Note
Bearing with increased radial force
The roller bearings used here could sustain damage if they are operated under no load.
Observe the specified minimum radial forces!

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5  =XO¦VVLJH%HODVWXQJVJUHQ]H
)
5 I¾U:HOOHQHQGH[
[  SHUPLVVLEOHORDGOLPLWIRU
 VKDIWHQG[
  RSWLRQ9


 

   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-23 SH 132, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5  =XO¦VVLJH%HODVWXQJVJUHQ]H
)
5 I¾U:HOOHQHQGH[
[  SHUPLVVLEOHORDGOLPLWIRU
 VKDIWHQG[
  RSWLRQ9


 


   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-24 SH 132, High Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

>N1@
=XO¦VVLJH%HODVWXQJVJUHQ]H
Q>USP@
 I¾U:HOOHQHQGH[
)
5 SHUPLVVLEOHORDGOLPLWIRU
)
5
[ VKDIWHQG[

 RSWLRQ9




 


   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-25 SH 132, Advanced Lifetime, 40,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 121
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Permissible radial forces for SH 160

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5
[  

 


 

   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-26 SH 160, Standard, and Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

5DGLDOIRUFHFKDUW,QWRWDO
5DGLDOIRUFH)1
R

'LVWDQFH[PP

Figure 4-27 SH 160, increased radial force, 16,000 h bearing lifetime, minimum radial force: 1 kN

Note
Bearing with increased radial force
The roller bearings used here could sustain damage if they are operated under no load.
Observe the specified minimum radial forces!

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

122 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

>N1@
 Q>USP@
)
5
)
5  
[




 



   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-28 SH 160, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

>N1@
 Q>USP@
)
5
)
5  
[




 



   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-29 SH 160, High Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

>N1@
Q>USP@
) 
) 5
5
[  






   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-30 SH 160, Advanced Lifetime, 40,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 123
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Permissible radial forces for SH 180

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5
[  

 

 


   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-31 SH 180, Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

>N1@ Q>USP@
 
)
5
)
5 
[ 



 

   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-32 SH 180, increased radial force, 12,000 h bearing lifetime, minimum radial force: 4 kN

Note
Bearing with increased radial force
The roller bearings used here could sustain damage if they are operated under no load.
Observe the specified minimum radial forces!

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5
[ 





 


   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-33 SH 180, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

124 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Permissible radial forces for SH 225

>N1@
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5
[  




 


   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-34 SH 225, Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

>N1@
Q>USP@


)
5
)
5 
[ 




 

 

   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-35 SH 225, increased radial force, 12,000 h bearing lifetime, minimum radial force: 5 kN

Note
Bearing with increased radial force
The roller bearings used here could sustain damage if they are operated under no load.
Observe the specified minimum radial forces!

N1
Q>USP@

)
5
)
5

[ 

 




   
[ >PP@
Figure 4-36 SH 225, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 125
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Permissible radial forces for SH 280

N1 Q>USP@
 
)
5
)
5
[ 

 



    

[ >PP@
Figure 4-37 SH 280, Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

N1
Q>USP@

)
5 
)
5 )HVWLJNHLWVJUHQ]H
[  GHU:HOOHQHQGHQ
%UHDNLQJSRLQW
 RIVKDIWH[WHQVLRQV






    

[ >PP@
Figure 4-38 SH 280, increased radial force, 12,000 h bearing lifetime,minimum radial force: 9 kN

Note
Bearing with increased radial force
The roller bearings used here could sustain damage if they are operated under no load.
Observe the specified minimum radial forces!

Axial forces
Deep-groove ball bearings can absorb both radial as well as axial forces.
The maximum axial forces FA as a function of the radial force are shown in the following
force diagrams.
The permissible bearing forces are specified without taking into account the force due to
spring-loaded bearings, the rotor weight for vertical mounting as well as the direction of the
force.

Note
Determining the permissible axial forces
The permissible axial forces at the shaft extension FA perm are dependent on the application
(mounting, force direction) and must be calculated.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

126 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Forces due to the rotor weight and spring-loading forces

Table 4-24 Force due to weight and spring-loading of the rotor

Motor type Force due to weight FL Force due to spring-loading FC

N +/- 25 %
N
1PH8081 65 450
1PH8083 90
1PH8087 115
1PH8101 120 550
1PH8103 150
1PH8105 195
1PH8107 220
1PH8131 270 900
1PH8133 330
1PH8135 390
1PH8137 445
1PH8138
1PH8163 600 1200
1PH8164
1PH8165 715
1PH8166
1PH8167 655
1PH8168
1PH8184 900 880
1PH8184 (type of construction IM V5, 2300
V15)
1PH8186 1150 880
1PH8186 (type of construction IM V5, 2300
V15)
1PH8224 1710 880
1PH8226 2160
1PH8228 2570
1PH8284 3300 1100
1PH8286 4000
1PH8288 4700

Note
For motors, shaft heights 80 to 160, the spring loading of the bearing Fc can be increased by
using option Q81. For description of option Q81, see Chapter "Motor components and options".

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 127
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Permissible axial forces for shaft height 80


>1@

5 
)



>USP@

>USP@


>USP@

 >USP@
>USP@
>USP@
 >USP@




     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-39 SH 80, Standard, and Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime


>1@


)
5
>USP@



>USP@

>USP@
>USP@
 >USP@
>USP@

>USP@



     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-40 SH 80, Performance, High Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

128 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces


>1@


)
5





 >USP@
>USP@
 >USP@
>USP@
 >USP@




     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-41 SH 80, Advanced Lifetime, 40,000 h bearing lifetime

Permissible axial forces for shaft height 100


>1@


)
5




>USP@
 >USP@

>USP@

>USP@
>USP@
 >USP@
>USP@




     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-42 SH 100, Standard, and Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 129
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Table 4-25 SH 100, increased radial force, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

Motor type Max. permissible axial force as a function of speed

1PH810 Speed n 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
r/min
Axial force FA 2100 2050 1950 1850 1750 1700 1650
N

Note
The permissible axial force is absorbed exclusively by the deep-groove ball bearing of the duplex
bearing. The cylindrical roller bearing absorbs the radial force. The axial force FAZ that is
permissible during operation is calculated as stated in table "Calculating the permissible axial
force (Page 115)."


>1@

>USP@

)
5



>USP@


>USP@

>USP@
>USP@

>USP@






     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-43 SH 100, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

130 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces


>1@

>USP@

)
5



>USP@


>USP@

>USP@
>USP@

>USP@


>USP@




     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-44 SH 100, High Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime


>1@


)
5
>USP@


>USP@


>USP@

 >USP@
>USP@








     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-45 SH 100, Advanced Lifetime, 40,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 131
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Permissible axial forces for SH 132


>1@


)
5
 >USP@

 >USP@

 >USP@

>USP@

>USP@
>USP@





>USP@




     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-46 SH 132, Standard, and Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

Table 4-26 SH 132, increased radial force, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

Motor type Max. permissible axial force as a function of speed

1PH813 Speed n 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 6500 -
r/min
Axial force FA 2600 2550 2400 2250 2200 2100 -
N

Note
The permissible axial force is absorbed exclusively by the deep-groove ball bearing of the duplex
bearing. The cylindrical roller bearing absorbs the radial force. The axial force FAZ that is
permissible during operation is calculated as stated in table "Calculating the permissible axial
force (Page 115)."

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

132 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces


>1@


)
5

>USP@




>USP@

>USP@
 >USP@




>USP@

     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-47 SH 132, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime


>1@


)
5




>USP@



>USP@

>USP@
>USP@
 >USP@


>USP@

     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-48 SH 132, High Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 133
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces


>1@


)
5



 >USP@

>USP@

>USP@
 >USP@

>USP@





     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-49 SH 132, Advanced Lifetime, 40,000 h bearing lifetime

Permissible axial forces for SH 160

>1@ 
>USP@
>USP@
)
5  >USP@
>USP@
>USP@
 >USP@








      
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-50 SH 160, Standard, and Standard with locating bearing, 20,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

134 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

Table 4-27 SH 160, increased radial force, 16,000 h bearing lifetime

Motor type Max. permissible axial force as a function of speed

1PH816 Speed n 1500 2000 3000 4000 5300 - -
r/min
Axial force FA 4000 3800 3550 3400 3250 - -
N

Note
The permissible axial force is absorbed exclusively by the deep-groove ball bearing of the duplex
bearing. The cylindrical roller bearing absorbs the radial force. The axial force FAZ that is
permissible during operation is calculated as stated in table "Calculating the permissible axial
force."

>1@ 
>USP@
 >USP@
)
5  >USP@
>USP@
 >USP@














     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-51 SH 160, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 135
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

>1@ 
>USP@
 >USP@
)
5  >USP@
>USP@
 >USP@














     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-52 SH 160, High Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

>1@ 
>USP@
 >USP@
)
5  >USP@
>USP@
 >USP@














     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-53 SH 160, Performance, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

136 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces

>1@ 
>USP@
 >USP@
) >USP@
5
 >USP@
















     
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-54 SH 160, Advanced Lifetime, 40,000 h bearing lifetime

See also
Axial force (Page 115)

Permissible axial forces for SH 180


>1@
>USP@

)
5

>USP@
 >USP@
>USP@

>USP@









      
)
$
>1@

Figure 4-55 SH 180, Standard/Performance, 20,000/12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 137
Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces


>1@
>USP@

)
5
>USP@



>USP@
>USP@

>USP@







     
)
$ >1@

Figure 4-56 SH 180, increased cantilever forces, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

Permissible axial forces for SH 225


>1@ >USP@

)
5

>USP@


>USP@


 >USP@










      
)
$ >1@

Figure 4-57 SH 225, Standard/Performance, 20,000/12,000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

138 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.7 Radial and axial forces


>1@ >USP@

)
5

>USP@




>USP@

>USP@







     
) >1@
$

Figure 4-58 SH 225, increased cantilever forces, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

Permissible axial forces for SH 280


>1@
>USP@

)
5

>USP@


>USP@
>USP@







      
) >1@
$

Figure 4-59 SH 280, Standard, 20000 h bearing lifetime

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 139
Mechanical properties
4.8 Radial eccentricity, concentricity and axial eccentricity

>1@
>USP@


)
5 >USP@

>USP@
>USP@









      
) >1@
$

Figure 4-60 SH 280, increased cantilever forces, 12,000 h bearing lifetime

4.8 Radial eccentricity, concentricity and axial eccentricity

The shaft and flange accuracies are always checked in accordance with DIN 42955, IEC 60072.
For shaft heights 180, 225 and 280, however, the flange accuracy is checked in accordance with
DIN 50347. Data deviating from these values are indicated in the dimension drawings.

Table 4-28 Radial eccentricity tolerance of the shaft to the frame axis (in relation to the cylindrical
shaft extensions)

Shaft height Tolerance level N Tolerance level R Tolerance SPECIAL

80 0.05 0.025 0.01
100 0.05 0.025 0.01
132 0.05 0.025 0.01
160 0.06 0.03 0.01
180 0.06 0.03 -
225 0.06 0.03 -
280 0.07 0.035 -

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

140 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.8 Radial eccentricity, concentricity and axial eccentricity

O
O

Figure 4-61 Checking the radial eccentricity

Table 4-29 Concentricity and axial eccentricity tolerance of the flange surface to the shaft axis
(referred to the centering diameter of the mounting flange)

Shaft height Tolerance level N Tolerance level R Tolerance SPECIAL

80 0.1 0.05 0.03
100 0.1 0.05 0.04
132 0.125 0.063 0.04
160 0.125 0.063 0.04
180 0.125 0.063 -
225 0.125 0.063 -
280 0.16 0.08 -

$ %
 

PP
PP




 

Figure 4-62 Checking the concentricity and axial eccentricity

Note
Acceptance test certificate
The runout, concentricity and axial eccentricity are tested in the Siemens factories as standard.
For 1PH8 motors, an acceptance test certificate with the values actual measured can be ordered
with option B36.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 141
Mechanical properties
4.9 Balancing

4.9 Balancing

4.9.1 Requirements

Requirements placed on the process when balancing mounted components - especially belt
pulleys
In addition to the balance quality of the motor, the vibration quality of motors with mounted belt
pulleys and coupling is essentially determined by the balance quality of the mounted
component.
If the motor and mounted component are separately balanced before they are assembled,
then the process used to balance the belt pulley or coupling must be adapted to the motor
balancing type.
For asynchronous motors, a differentiation should be made between the following balancing
types:
• Half-key balancing (an "H" is stamped on the shaft face)
• Full-key balancing (an "F" is stamped on the shaft face)
• Smooth shaft end (no keyway)
The balancing type is coded in the order designation.

Note
Machining the feather key
In the case of a half-key balanced shaft end and short output element, remove if necessary the
part of the feather key which protrudes out of the output element and beyond the shaft contour.
This is urgently recommended at speeds above 1000 r/min, and where the balance quality must
comply with high demands.
For the highest demands placed on the system balance quality, we recommend that motors with
smooth shaft (without keyway) are used. For motors balanced with full key, we recommend belt
pulleys with two keyways on opposite sides, however, with only one key in the shaft end.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

142 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.9 Balancing

Table 4-30 Requirements placed on the balancing process as a function of the motor balancing type

Balancing equipment/ Motor Motor balanced with full key Motor with plain
Process step Half key balanced shaft end
Auxiliary shaft to balance • Auxiliary shaft with key‐ • Auxiliary shaft with key‐ • Auxiliary shaft without
the mounted component way way keyway
• Keyway with the same di‐ • Slot design with the ex‐ • If required, use a tapered
mensions as in the motor ception of the slot width auxiliary shaft
shaft end (as the motor) can be free‐
• Auxiliary shaft half key ly selected
balanced • Auxiliary shaft full key bal‐
anced
• Balance quality of the auxiliary shaft ≤ 10 % of the required balance quality of the compo‐
nent to be mounted to the motor
Attaching the mounted com‐ • Attached using a key • Attached using a key • Attach the component as
ponent far as possible without
• Key design, dimensions • Key design, dimensions
to the auxiliary shaft for bal‐ any play,
and materials the same as and material the same as
ancing e.g. using a light press fit
at the motor shaft end used for the full key bal‐
ancing of the auxiliary on the tapered shaft
shaft
Position the mounted compo‐ • Select a position between • No special requirements
nent on the auxiliary shaft the mounted component
and the key of the auxili‐
ary shaft so that it is the
same when mounted on
the actual motor
Balance the mounted compo‐ • Two-plane balancing is recommended - i.e. balancing in two planes at both sides of the
nent mounted components at right angles to the axis of rotation

Special requirements
If special requirements are placed on the smooth running operation of the machine, we
recommend that the motor together with the output components is completely balanced. In this
case, balancing should be carried out in two planes of the output component.

4.9.2 Balancing 1PH8 motors with "Premium Performance" bearing version

The on-site mechanical system vibration characteristics depend on factors such as the output
elements, mounting situation, alignment, installation, and external vibration and can increase
the level of motor vibration. Under certain circumstances, the rotor may have to be balanced
completely with the output element.
1PH8 motors are supplied with "special" vibration severity. Mounting a coupling element on
the shaft extension changes the rotor balancing state. As a consequence, after mounting
coupling elements, the rotor must be completely balanced. The following description shows,
using an example, the procedure for 1PH8 motors with "Premium Performance" bearing
version. You must determine the vibration severity and the position of the imbalance by
making the appropriate measurements. You can then remove the imbalance.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 143
Mechanical properties
4.9 Balancing

Measuring unit required

2-channel vibration measuring unit
Frequency bandwidth: 10 Hz to 1000 Hz
The measuring unit must be equipped with a function to analyze orders of frequency
components. Using this function, you can display the imbalance (1st order vibration
component).

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

144 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.9 Balancing

Typical approach
 1. Prepare to make the reference measurement. Freely suspend the motor according to

IEC 60034-14.
The natural frequency of the motor-spring system must be less than 3 Hz. As a consequence,
use springs that are adapted to the motor mass. The motor must be freely suspended so that
the reference measurement can provide a correct measurement result.

2. Make a reference mark on the shaft (DE) for the speed and angle detection.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 145
Mechanical properties
4.9 Balancing

5HIHUHQFHPDUNIRUWKHVSHHG
DQGDQJOHGHWHFWLRQ

6HQVRU'(&K 6HQVRU'(&K

3. Position the measuring sensors: Sensor 1 for the DE, sensor 2 for the NDE.
4. Perform the reference measurement on the freely suspended motor for the DE and the NDE.
Measure the absolute value and angular position of the imbalance (1st order).

5. Attach the coupling to the shaft extension (DE).

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

146 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.9 Balancing

6. Perform the measurement on the coupled motor for the DE and the NDE. Also in this case,
measure the absolute value and angular position of the imbalance (1st order).
ODUJHVWLPEDODQFHDPRXQW



r

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 147
Mechanical properties
4.10 Vibration response

7. Remove the imbalance. To do this, screw one or several balancing screws into the rotor. Start
at the side with the highest absolute imbalance. For instance, if you detect an imbalance at
the DE at an angle of 175°, then you must screw in a balancing screw on the opposite side at
an angle of 355° (175° + 180° = 355°).

,QVHUWEDODQFLQJVFUHZDWWKH'( ,QVHUWEDODQFLQJVFUHZDWWKH1'(

8. It may be necessary to repeat Point 6 and Point 7 several times until the imbalance has been
completely removed.

4.10 Vibration response

4.10.1 Mounting and mounting instructions

In order to ensure smooth, vibration-free motor operation, a stable foundation design is
required, the motor must be precisely aligned, and the components that are to be mounted on
the shaft extension must be correctly balanced.
The following mounting instructions must be carefully observed:
• For high-speed machines, we recommend that the complete unit is dynamically balanced
after couplings or belt pulleys have been mounted.
• Use suitable equipment when mounting drive elements. Use the thread at the shaft
extension.
• Do not apply any shocks or axial pressure to the shaft extension.
• Especially for high-speed motors with flange mounting, it is important that the mounting is
stiff in order to locate any natural frequency as high as possible so that it remains above the
maximum rotational frequency.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

148 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.10 Vibration response

• Thin sheets (shims) can be placed under the motor mounting feet to align the motor and to
avoid mechanically stressing the motor. The number of shims used should be kept to a
minimum.
• In order to securely mount the motors and reliably and safely transfer the drive torque, bolts
with strength class 8.8 according to ISO 898-1 should be used.
Note
Comply with permissible vibration values
All flange-mounted motors must have a stable motor suspension assembly and for high field
weakening speeds must be supported using the appropriate feet at the bearing end shield
(foot/flange type of construction, also refer to Section "Vibration severity limit values").
Support using feet at the bearing end shield is not required if the following conditions are
maintained:
- For flange-mounted motors, there is a stable motor suspension design
- The permissible vibration values according to DIN ISO 10816 are maintained
- The maximum speed is limited (refer to Table "Restricting the maximum speed")
Motors that are mounted, as a result of their type of construction, to the wall using the motor
feet, must be fixed in place using an adequately dimensioned positive form fit (e.g. using
studs or mounting rails).
When commissioning the motors, it must be ensured that the permissible vibration values
according to DIN ISO 10816 are maintained.

Table 4-31 Limiting the maximum speed

Shaft height Max. permissible speed

mm r/min
180 3000
225 2500
280 2000

Table 4-32 Flange mounting with threaded studs and nuts

Shaft height M1
mm mm
180 32
225 45
280 45 0RWRU

0

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 149
Mechanical properties
4.10 Vibration response

Note
Flange mounting SH 180 to SH 280
For SH 180 to SH 280, flange mounting is only possible using studs and nuts. Clearance M1 for
threading the nut between the motor flange and motor frame according to DIN 42948.

NOTICE
Check the bearing
If liquid accumulates at the flange because of vertical or horizontal mounting, the bearing and
the bearing grease may be adversely affected.
• Prevent liquid from collecting at the flange.

Note
Attaching plastic covers for SH 80 up to SH 160
• With the forced-ventilated versions of shaft heights 80 to 160, before the motor is
commissioned you must replace the plastic covers that were removed so that the mounting
bolts could be tightened.

6,(0(16

DOZD\VUHSODFH

ZLHGHUHLQVHW]HQ

Figure 4-63 Cover for mounting foot

Note
Mounting air-cooled motors
• Air-cooled motors must be mounted in such a way that the cooling air can enter and be
discharged without any obstruction (see also Chapter "Cooling").

4.10.2 Natural frequency when mounted

The motor is a system which is capable of vibration at its natural frequency. For all motors, this
natural frequency lies above the specified maximum speed.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

150 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.10 Vibration response

When the motor is mounted onto a machine, a new system, which is capable of vibration, is
created with modified natural frequencies. These can lie within the motor speed range.
This can result in undesirable vibrations in the mechanical drive transmission.

Note
Avoiding natural frequencies when mounting
Motors must be carefully mounted on adequately stiff foundations or bedplates. Additional
elasticities of the foundation/bedplates can result in resonance effects of the natural frequency
at the operating speed and therefore result in inadmissibly high vibration values.

The magnitude of the natural frequency when the motor is mounted depends on various
factors and can be influenced by the following points:
• Mechanical transmission elements (gearboxes, belts, couplings, pinions, etc.)
• Stiffness of the machine design to which the motor is mounted
• Stiffness of the motor in the area around the foot or customer flange
• Motor weight
• Machine weight and the weight of the mechanical system in the vicinity of the motor
• Damping properties of the motor and the driven machine
• Mounting type, mounting position (IM B5, IM B3, IM B35, IM V1, etc.)
• Motor weight distribution, i.e. length, shaft height

4.10.3 Misalignment
To avoid or minimize misalignment, a compensating coupling should be used (see the diagram).

'ULYHRXWWUDQVPLVVLRQ &RXSOLQJ 0RWRU

VKDIWZLWKRZQEHDULQJV

Figure 4-64 Mechanical output transmission shaft with its own bearings and compensating coupling

If possible, the motor should not be directly and rigidly coupled to an output transmission
shaft which has its own bearings.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 151
Mechanical properties
4.10 Vibration response

However, if a rigid coupling is absolutely necessary for mechanical design reasons,

misalignment deviations must be avoided. In this case, a careful check must be made by
making the appropriate measurements.

Vertical and horizontal alignment

The following measures are required to compensate for any radial offset at the coupling and
to horizontally adjust the electric motor with respect to the driven load:
• Place shims under the motor feet to position it vertically and to prevent stress in the machine.
The number of shims should be kept as low as possible, so use as few thicker shims as possible
instead of several thinner shims.
• For horizontal positioning, push the motor sideways on the foundation Pay attention to
maintaining the axial position.
• When positioning the motor, ensure that a uniform axial gap is maintained around the
coupling. Note on alignment accuracy: Remember to take account of data concerning the
alignment accuracy of the driven load and the coupling.

Alignment accuracy
1. Align the motors with coupling output in such a manner that the center lines of the shafts are
parallel with no offset. This ensures that no additional forces affect their bearings during
operation.
2. Perform the fine adjustments with shims under the entire motor foot.

 

š'

\
Figure 4-65 Aligning the drive

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

152 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.10 Vibration response

Table 4-33 Permissible deviations when aligning the motor

Permissible deviations Radial shaft offset Axial shaft offset

x y
Flexible coupling 0.05 mm 0.05 mm

4.10.4 Flywheels
Flywheels with a high mass, which are rigidly mounted to the end of the motor shaft, modify the
vibration characteristics of the motor and shift the critical rotational frequencies of the motor
into the lower speed ranges.
The overall system should be precision balanced in order to minimize/avoid exciting
vibration, when external masses are directly mounted onto the motor shaft.
Operation in the resonance range must be avoided.

4.10.5 Vibration stressing

The on-site system vibration behavior depends on factors such as the output elements,
mounting situation, alignment, installation, and external vibration and can increase the level of
vibration on the motor.
Under certain circumstances, the rotor may have to be completely balanced with the output
element.
To ensure problem-free operation and a long service life, the vibration values according to
ISO 10816 must not be exceeded at the defined measuring points on the motor.

Table 4-34 Maximum permissible radial vibration values for SH 80 to 1601)

Vibration frequency Vibration values

< 6.3 Hz Vibration amplitude s ≤ 0.16 mm
6.3 ... 250 Hz Vibration velocity vrms ≤ 4.5 mm/s
> 250 Hz Vibration acceleration a ≤ 10 m/s2

Table 4-35 Maximum permissible radial vibration values for SH 180 to 2801)

Vibration frequency Vibration values

< 6.3 Hz Vibration amplitude s ≤ 0.25 mm
6.3 ... 63 Hz Vibration velocity vrms ≤ 7.1 mm/s
> 63 Hz Vibration acceleration a ≤ 4.0 m/s2

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 153
Mechanical properties
4.10 Vibration response

Table 4-36 Maximum permissible axial vibration values for SH 80 to 1601)

Vibration velocity Vibration acceleration

vrms = 4.5 mm/s apeak = 2.25 m/s2

1) Both values must be maintained simultaneously

7F꫻
JO

NNTr 


N

B
ࣧ

N




N


T
ࣧ

T r

 
    
G
JO
)[

Figure 4-66 Maximum permissible vibration velocity including vibration amplitude and vibration
acceleration for SH 80 to 160

Table 4-37 Maximum permissible axial vibration values for SH 180 to 2801)

Vibration velocity Vibration acceleration

vrms = 7.1 mm/s apeak = 3.55 m/s2

1) Both values must be maintained simultaneously

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

154 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.10 Vibration response

YHII
>PPV@




Dื
P








P
Vื

V


 
    
I>+]@

Figure 4-67 Maximum permissible vibration velocity including vibration amplitude and vibration
acceleration for SH 180 to 280

To measure the vibration velocity, the measuring equipment must fulfill the requirements of
ISO 2954. The vibration acceleration must be measured as a peak value in the time range in a
frequency band of 10 to 2000 Hz.
If appreciable vibration excitation in excess of 2000 Hz (e.g. gear teeth meshing frequencies)
can be expected, the measurement range must be adapted accordingly. This does not alter
the maximum permissible values.

Note
Avoiding continuous operation at natural frequencies
Uninterrupted duty in the natural frequencies of the installed/mounted system should be
avoided, as this generally leads to the permissible vibration values being exceeded and the
system being damaged. To reduce vibration, flanged-mounted motors can be supported at the
NDE.

Note
Measuring vibration values according to the standard
Vibration must be analyzed and measured (measuring points, etc.) according to standard
ISO 10816-3.

Note
Increased resistance to vibration
1PH8 motors with shaft heights 180 and 225 and with the option L03 can be used in compliance
with certain operating conditions for applications with increased resistance to vibration (see
Chapter "Increased resistance to vibration (Page 180)"). Possible applications are, for example,
applications such as servo presses.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 155
 Mechanical properties
4.11 Vibration severity grade

4.11 Vibration severity grade

The 1PH8 motors conform to vibration severity level A in accordance with EN 60034-14
(IEC 600-34-14). The values indicated refer only to the motor. The system vibration response
depends on the conditions at the installation location and can result in higher vibration values
at the motor.

Note
Vibration severity limit values
According to the vibration severity limit value diagrams below, the motors operate within the
limit values stipulated for versions R, S, SR or SPECIAL over the specified speed range.
Furthermore, within the rated speed range, they correspond to vibration severity grades A or B
as defined by EN 60034-14 (IEC 600-34-14).
The balance quality depending on the bearing is encoded in the Article No., see Chapter
"Selection and ordering data."

As a general rule, high radial force load capacity is not compatible with high speed and
high vibration quality. The reason for this is that the different applications require different
bearings.


9LEUDWLRQYHORFLW\>PPV@

6

5

65


 $
63(&,$/

%



            

'HILQLWLRQUDQJH 'HILQLWLRQUDQJHIRU3UHPLXP3HUIRUPDQFH 6SHHG>USP@

UDWHGVSHHGV UDWHGVSHHGVIRU6+

Figure 4-68 Vibration severity limit values for SH 80 to 132

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

156 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Mechanical properties
4.12 Noise emission

 5


9LEUDWLRQYHORFLW\>PPV@
6


 65
$



%

63(&,$/



     
'HILQLWLRQUDQJH 6SHHG>USP@
UDWHGVSHHGV
Figure 4-69 Vibration severity limit values for SH 160 to 280

Note
Acceptance test certificate
Compliance with the limits, depending on the vibration severity grade ordered, is ensured in the
Siemens factories as standard. For 1PH8 motors, an acceptance test certificate with the vibration
velocities actually measured can be ordered with option B35.

4.12 Noise emission

The noise emissions of the 1PH8 depend on the type of cooling and are therefore described in
Chapter "Cooling (Page 69)."

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 157
Mechanical properties
4.12 Noise emission

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

158 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Motor components and options 5
5.1 Motor components

5.1.1 Thermal motor protection

A Pt1000 temperature sensor is integrated in the stator winding to monitor the winding
temperature. The exact type of temperature sensor is stated on the nameplate.

Table 5-1 Features and technical data

Type Pt1000
Resistance when cold (20 °C) Approx. 1090 Ω
Resistance when hot (100 °C) Approx. 1390 Ω
Connection Via signal cable
Response temperature 1)
Prewarning < 150 °C
Alarm/trip at max. 170 °C ±5 °C
1)
With SH80: Prewarning < 130 °C; Alarm/trip at max. 150 °C ±5 °C

The resistance change is proportional to the winding temperature change. The temperature
characteristic is taken into account in the closed-loop control.
The prewarning signal from the evaluation circuit in the SINAMICS drive converter can be
externally evaluated.
High short-term overload conditions require additional protective measures as a result of the
thermal coupling time of the temperature sensor.
The conductors for the temperature sensor are routed in one cable together with the encoder
conductors.

NOTICE
Destruction of the temperature sensor if the insulation resistance is tested improperly.
If the test voltage is connected to only one temperature sensor terminal, the temperature
sensor will be destroyed.
• Short-circuit the ends of the temperature sensor cables before applying the test voltage.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 159
Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

NOTICE
Destruction of the motor for a thermally critical load
There is no adequate protection during a thermally critical load, e.g. a high overload at motor
standstill.
• Take additional protective measures, e.g. an overcurrent relay.
• The "thermal motor model i2t monitoring" function must be activated in the converter.

Note
Connector for temperature sensors
The temperature sensor is connected to the signal connector together with the speed encoder
signal.
1PH8 motors without an encoder can only be ordered as induction motors. In this case, the
temperature sensor is connected to the signal terminal strip in the terminal box. An additional
M16 x 1.5 cable entry is provided in the terminal box to establish a connection. For encoderless
1PH8 motors connected using a connector, the temperature sensor is connected to the encoder
connector (connector version and assignment the same as for HTL encoders).
The spare temperature sensor (option A25 for shaft heights 80 to 160) and the circuit of PTC
thermistors for alarm/trip (option A12) are connected to a signal terminal block in the terminal
box.

5.1.2 Encoder

5.1.2.1 Encoder overview

The encoder is encrypted at the 9th position of the motor Article number using the appropriate
letters.

Note
Different encoder types for motors with or without DRIVE-CLiQ
The identification letters at the 9th position of the Article No. for the encoder type required is
different for motors with and without DRIVE-CLiQ.

Table 5-2 Encoder types for motors without DRIVE-CLiQ

Encoder type 9th position of the Arti‐

cle No.
Without encoder A
Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder AM2048S/R) E
Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder HTL 1024 S/R) H
Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder HTL 2048 S/R) J

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

160 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

Encoder type 9th position of the Arti‐

cle No.
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 2048 S/R with C and D tracks M
(encoder IC 2048 S/R)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 512 S/R without C and D tracks T
(encoder IN 512 S/R)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 256 S/R without C and D tracks C
(encoder IN 256 S/R)

Table 5-3 Encoder types for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ

Encoder type 9th position of the Arti‐

cle No.
Absolute encoder, 22-bit singleturn + 12-bit multiturn (encoder AM22DQ) F
Incremental encoder, 22-bit, with commutation position (encoder IC22DQ) D
Incremental encoder 20-bit without commutation position (encoder N20DQ) U
Incremental encoder 19-bit without commutation position (encoder S
IN19DQ)
External encoder (only possible for shaft height 280 and forced ventilation)
Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R HOG 22 (Baumer-Hübner) G
Mounting prepared (additional Z options must be considered)
Incremental encoder HTL 1024 pulses/revolution POG 10 (Baumer-Hübner) K
Mounting prepared (additional Z options must be considered)

5.1.2.2 Encoder connection for motors with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface

WARNING
Danger to life when using an incorrect encoder module
The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder contains motor and encoder-specific data and an electronic type plate.
If you use an incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, this can result in death, severe injury and severe
material damage.
• Only use the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder and the electronic type plate for the original motor.
• Do not mount the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder onto other motors.
• Do not replace a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder by a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder belonging to another motor.
• Only appropriately trained Siemens service personnel should replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoders.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 161
Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These modules can be easily destroyed if they are not handled properly.
• To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the chapter ESD
Guidelines.

Motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interface have an internal Sensor Module. This Sensor Module includes
an electronic rating plate. This simplifies commissioning for the SINAMICS S110 / S120 drive
system, since all the motor parameters are set automatically.

5.1.2.3 Encoder connection for motors without DRIVE-CLiQ (12/17-pole)

Motors without DRIVE-CLiQ are connected using the 12 or 17-pin flange socket by default.

See also
Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R or HTL 2048 S/R (Page 165)

5.1.2.4 Encoder assignment as a function of maximum permissible speeds

The following tables show the possible assignments of encoders to the 1PH8 motor series as a
function of maximum permissible speeds.

Table 5-4 Encoder types for motors without DRIVE-CLiQ

Encoder type Without AM2048 HTL1024 HTL2048 IC2048 IN512 IN256

encoder S/R S/R S/R S/R S/R S/R
9th data position A E H J M T C
Permissible - 12,000 9000 4600 12,000 15,000 24,000
nmax speeds
(encoder) in r/min
Motor version nmax
and (motor)
bearing system r/min
1PH808□-1□□□□- 10,000 ✓ ✓ ✓2) ✓4) ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH808□-1□□□□- 15,000 ✓ - - - ✓3) ✓ ✓
□L□2
1PH808□-1□□□□- 20,000 ✓ - - - ✓3) ✓5) ✓
□M□2
1PH808□-1□□□□- 24,000 - - - - - - ✓
□N□2
1PH808□-1□□□□- 5000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓4) ✓ - -
□Q□2

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

162 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

Encoder type Without AM2048 HTL1024 HTL2048 IC2048 IN512 IN256

encoder S/R S/R S/R S/R S/R S/R
9th data position A E H J M T C
Permissible - 12,000 9000 4600 12,000 15,000 24,000
nmax speeds
(encoder) in r/min
Motor version nmax
and (motor)
bearing system r/min
1PH810□-1□□□□- 9000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓4) ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH810□-1□□□□- 12,000 ✓ ✓ - - ✓ ✓ ✓
□L□2
1PH810□-1□□□□- 18,000 ✓ - - - ✓3) ✓5) ✓
□M□2
1PH810□-1□□□□- 5000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓4) ✓ - -
□Q□2
1PH813□-1□□□□- 8000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓4) ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH813□-1□□□□- 10,000 ✓ ✓ - - ✓ ✓ ✓
□L□2
1PH813□-1□□□□- 15,000 ✓ - - - ✓3) ✓ ✓
□M□2
1PH813□-1□□□□- 4500 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
□Q□2
1PH813□-2□□□□- 4500 - ✓ - - ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH813□-5□□□□- 6500 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH813□-7□□□□- 6500 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH816□-1□□□□- 6500 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓4) ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH816□-1□□□□- 9000 ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓
□L□2
1PH816□-1□□□□- 10,000 ✓ - - - ✓ ✓ ✓
□M□2
1PH816□-1□□□□- 4000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
□Q□2
1PH816□-2□□□□- 4000 - ✓ - - ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH816□-5□□□□- 5000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH816□-7□□□□- 5000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH818□-1□□□□- 5000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓4) ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH818□-1□□□□- 7500 ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ - -
□L□2

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 163
Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

Encoder type Without AM2048 HTL1024 HTL2048 IC2048 IN512 IN256

encoder S/R S/R S/R S/R S/R S/R
9th data position A E H J M T C
Permissible - 12,000 9000 4600 12,000 15,000 24,000
nmax speeds
(encoder) in r/min
Motor version nmax
and (motor)
bearing system r/min
1PH818□-2□□□□- 3800 - ✓ - - ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH822□-1□□□□- 4500 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH822□-1□□□□- 6000 ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ - -
□L□2
1PH822□-2□□□□- 3500 - ✓ - - ✓ - -
□□□2
1PH828□-1□□□□- 3300 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
□□□2

✓ Assignment possible
2) Motor/encoder assignment limited to 9000 r/min
3) Motor/encoder assignment limited to 12,000 r/min
4) Motor/encoder assignment limited to 4600 r/min
5) Motor/encoder assignment limited to 15,000 r/min

Table 5-5 Encoder types for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ

Encoder type AM22DQ IC22DQ IN20DQ IN19DQ

9th data position F D U S
Permissible nmax speeds (encoder) in r/min 12,000 12,000 15,000 24,000
Motor version and bearing system nmax (motor)
r/min
1PH808□-1□□□□-□□□1 10,000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH808□-1□□□□-□L□1 15,000 - ✓3) ✓ ✓
1PH808□-1□□□□-□M□1 20,000 - ✓3) ✓5) ✓
1PH808□-1□□□□-□N□1 24,000 - - - ✓
1PH808□-1□□□□-□Q□1 5000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH810□-1□□□□-□□□1 9000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH810□-1□□□□-□L□1 12,000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1PH810□-1□□□□-□M□1 18,000 - ✓3) ✓5) ✓
1PH810□-1□□□□-□Q□1 5000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH813□-1□□□□-□□□1 8000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH813□-1□□□□-□L□1 10,000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1PH813□-1□□□□-□M□1 15,000 - ✓3) ✓ ✓
1PH813□-1□□□□-□Q□1 4500 ✓ ✓ - -

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

164 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

Encoder type AM22DQ IC22DQ IN20DQ IN19DQ

9th data position F D U S
Permissible nmax speeds (encoder) in r/min 12,000 12,000 15,000 24,000
Motor version and bearing system nmax (motor)
r/min
1PH813□-2□□□□-□□□1 4500 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH813□-5□□□□-□□□1 6500 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH813□-7□□□□-□□□1 6500 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH816□-1□□□□-□□□1 6500 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH816□-1□□□□-□L□1 9000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1PH816□-1□□□□-□M□1 10,000 - ✓ ✓ ✓
1PH816□-1□□□□-□Q□1 4000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH816□-2□□□□-□□□1 4000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH816□-5□□□□-□□□1 5000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH816□-7□□□□-□□□1 5000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH818□-1□□□□-□□□1 5000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH818□-1□□□□-□L□1 7500 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH818□-2□□□□-□□□1 3800 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH822□-1□□□□-□□□1 4500 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH822□-1□□□□-□L□1 6000 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH822□-2□□□□-□□□1 3500 ✓ ✓ - -
1PH828□-1□□□□-□□□1 3300 ✓ ✓ - -

✓ Assignment possible
3) Motor/encoder assignment limited to 12,000 r/min
5) Motor/encoder assignment limited to 15,000 r/min

5.1.2.5 Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R or HTL 2048 S/R

Function
• Speed actual value sensing
• Indirect incremental measuring system for the position control loop
• One zero pulse (reference mark) per revolution

Table 5-6 Properties and technical data

Properties Incremental encoder HTL

Coupling at the NDE • with SH 80 to 225: Integrated in the motor
• with SH 280: Built on to the motor
Operating voltage +10 ... +30 V
Current consumption max. 150 mA
Incremental resolution 1024 S/R or 2048 S/R
(periods per revolution)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 165
Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

Properties Incremental encoder HTL

Incremental signals HTL
Track A, track B, Zero pulse and inverted signals
Angular error ±1'
Maximum permissible speeds • With 1024 S/R: 9000 r/min
• With 2048 S/R: 4600 r/min

Connection

Table 5-7 Connection assignment, 12-pin flange-mounted socket

PIN No. Signal

1 B*
2 +1R1
3 R
4 R*
5 A
1 9
6 A* 8
2 10 12
7 CTRL TACH 7
8 B 11
3 6
9 not connected 4 5
10 M encoder
11 -1R2
When viewing the plug-in side (pins)
12 P encoder

Cables
Mating connector: 6FX2003-0SU12

Table 5-8 Pre-fabricated cable for SINAMICS:

6FX ☐ 002 - 2AH00 - ☐☐☐ 0

↓ ↓↓↓
↓ Length
5 MOTION-CON‐ Max. cable lengths:
NECTⓇ500 without transfer of inverted signals,150 m
8 MOTION-CON‐ with transfer of inverted signals, 300 m
NECTⓇ800

For other technical data and length code, refer to catalog, Chapter "MOTION-CONNECT
connection system"

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

166 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

5.1.2.6 Incremental encoders IC 2048 S/R, IN 512 S/R and IN 256 S/R

Function
• Angular measuring system for the commutation
• Speed actual value sensing
• Indirect incremental measuring system for the position control loop
• One zero pulse (reference mark) per revolution

Properties Incremental encoder sin/cos 1Vpp

Coupling at the NDE • with SH 80 to 225: Integrated in the motor
• with SH 280: Built on to the motor
Operating voltage +5 V ±5 %
Current consumption max. 150 mA
Incremental resolution • 2048 S/R
(periods per revolution) • 512 S/R
• 256 S/R
Incremental signals 1 Vpp
Angular error ±40 '', for 256 S/R: ±93 "
Maximum permissible speeds • With 2048 S/R: 12,000 r/min
• With 512 S/R: 15,000 r/min
• With 256 S/R: 24,000 r/min

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 167
Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

8>9@ rbHO
rPHFK
rHO


$
 Ǿ

% Ǿ

rbHO

5
 Ǿ

rHOsrHO
8>9@

& Ǿ


'
 Ǿ

5

Ǿ

rHO rPHFK

Figure 5-1 Signal sequence and assignment for a positive direction of rotation (clockwise direction of
rotation when viewed from the drive end)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

168 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

Connection

Table 5-9 Connection assignment, 17-pin flange-mounted socket

PIN No. Signal

1 A
2 A*
3 R
4 D*
5 C
4
6 C* 3

7 M encoder 2 13 5
14
8 +1R1 1 12 17 6
15
9 -1R2 16
11 7
10 P encoder
10 8
11 B
9
12 B*
13 R* When viewing the plug-in side (pins)
14 D
15 0 V sense
16 5 V sense
17 not connected

Cables
Mating connector: 6FX2003-0SU17

Table 5-10 Pre-fabricated cable for SINAMICS

6FX ☐ 002 - 2CA31 - ☐☐☐ 0

↓ ↓↓↓
↓ Length
5 MOTION-CON‐
NECTⓇ500 Max. cable length 100 m
8 MOTION-CON‐
NECTⓇ800

For other technical data and length code, refer to catalog, Chapter "MOTION-CONNECT
connection system"

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 169
Motor components and options
5.1 Motor components

5.1.2.7 Absolute encoder AM 2048 S/R

Function
• Angular measuring system for the commutation
• Speed actual value sensing
• Indirect absolute measuring system for the position control loop

Table 5-11 Properties and technical data

Properties Absolute encoder (EnDat)

Coupling at the NDE • with SH 80 to 225: Integrated in the motor
• with SH 280: Built on to the motor
Operating voltage +5 V ±5 %
Current consumption max. 300 mA
Incremental resolution (periods per revolution) 2048 S/R
Absolute resolution (coded revolution) 4096
Incremental signals 1 Vpp
Serial absolute position interface EnDat
Angular error ±40"
Maximum permissible speeds With 2048 S/R: 12,000 r/min

Connection

Table 5-12 Connection assignment, 17-pin flange-mounted socket

PIN No. Signal

1 A
2 A*
3 data
4 not connected
5 clock
6 not connected
7 M encoder
3 4
8 +1R1
2 13 5
9 -1R2 14
10 P encoder 1 12 17 6
15
11 B 11 16 7
12 B*
10 8
13 data*
9
14 clock*
15 0 V sense When viewing the plug-in side (pins)
16 5 V sense
17 not connected

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

170 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Cables
Mating connector: 6FX2003-0SU17

Table 5-13 Pre-fabricated cable for SINAMICS

6FX ☐ 002 - 2EQ10 - ☐☐☐ 0

↓ ↓↓↓
↓ Length
5 MOTION-CON‐
NECTⓇ500 Max. cable length 100 m
8 MOTION-CON‐
NECTⓇ800

For other technical data and length code, refer to catalog, Chapter "MOTION-CONNECT
connection system"

5.2 Options

5.2.1 Overview of options

Chapter "Selection and ordering data (Page 37)" contains an overview of which options are
available for which shaft heights.

5.2.2 Sealing air connection (option Q12)

Cooling lubricants containing oil capable of creepage, which can also be corrosive, are mainly
used for machine tools and transfer machines. For critical applications involving media with
extremely high creepage rates, generally degree of protection against water (according to EN
60034-5/IEC 60034-5) alone is not sufficient. To address these particular applications, 1PH8
main motors can be ordered with sealing air connection by specifying option Q12. The sealing
air connection can be implemented both when using a terminal box and a power connector.

Note
Improved protection against oils and media that can creep
Sealing air does not increase the IP degree of protection against water. It does, however, improve
protection against oils and media that can creep.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 171
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Note
This option is only permissible for motors without relubrication.

Note
Increase the pressure for "Premium Performance" bearing version
For the "Premium Performance" bearing version, you must increase the supply pressure to min.
2.0 x 105 Pa up to max. 5 x 105 Pa.

Conditioning: A Main drives without a shaft sealing ring

Min. inlet temperature (°C) Ambient temperature

Max. inlet temperature (°C) 40
Max. residual water content (g/m³) 0.12
Max. residual oil content (g/m³) 0.01
Max. residual dust (mg/m³) 0.1
Min. supply pressure (Pa) 2.0 x 105
Max. supply pressure (Pa) 3 x 105
Particle size for hollow shaft encoder (μm) <8
Particle size for optical encoders (µm) <3

Conditioning: B Main drives with a shaft sealing ring

Min. inlet temperature (°C) Ambient temperature

Max. inlet temperature (°C) 40
Max. residual water content (g/m³) 0.12
Max. residual oil content (g/m³) 0.01
Max. residual dust (mg/m³) 0.1
Min. supply pressure (Pa) 0.05 x 105
Max. supply pressure (Pa) 0.1 x 105
Particle size for hollow shaft encoder (μm) <8
Particle size for optical encoders (µm) <3

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

172 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

+RVH
&RQQHFWLRQQLSSOH LQQHUGLDPHWHUPP
HJ)HVWR460%0 RXWHUGLDPHWHUPP

7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
PD[1P
PLQ1P

&RQQHFWLRQKROH 0RXQWLQJH[DPSOH

Figure 5-2 Sealing air connection (option Q12)

Necessary sealing air volume

Volume (Nm³/h) (Nm = standard cubic meter) Approx. 2.3 (at 2 bar)

Note
The volume data refers to the specified minimum supply pressure. For higher supply pressures,
the flow rate increases corresponding to the motor flow resistance.

5.2.3 Protection against explosion (options M03 and M39)

Overview
The 1PH8 motors can be used in hazardous areas if certain operating conditions are met.

Explosion protection zone Option Shaft heights

2 M03 SH 100 to SH 160
22 M39 SH 100 to SH 160
SH 180 and SH 225

This intended use in a hazardous area Zone 2 or Zone 22 complies with directives
2014/34/EU and 1999/92/EC – as well as the series of IEC/EN 60079 standards.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 173
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Design criteria for shaft heights 100 to 160

Descriptions (data position in Article No.)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
1 P H 8
Shaft height 100 1 0
Shaft height 132 1 3
Shaft height 160 1 6
Overall length (cannot be selected, determined by the choice of rated
power)
Induction version 1
Synchronous version (only shaft height 132 and 160) 2
Encoder sys‐ Without encoder 1)
A
tems Absolute encoder EnDat 2048 S/R (encoder AM2048S/R) 2) E
for motors Incremental encoder HTL 1024 S/R (encoder H
without a HTL1024S/R) 1) 3)
DRIVE-CLiQ in‐ Incremental encoder HTL 2048 S/R (encoder J
terface HTL2048S/R) 1) 4)
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp 2048 S/R with C and D M
tracks (encoder IC2048S/R) 2)
Winding ver‐ Rated speeds 400 r/min, 500 r/min, 600 r/min B
sion (3 AC 380 V to 1000 r/min, 1150 r/min, 1350 r/min D
480 V) 1500 r/min, 1750 r/min, 2000 r/min F
2000 r/min, 2300 r/min, 2650 r/min G
Cooling Forced ventila‐ (degree of protection IP 55) 1
tion NDE -> DE
Water cooling (degree of protection IP 55) 2
Type of con‐ IM B3 (IM V5, IM V6) 0
struction IM B5 (IM V1, IM V3) 2
IM B35 (IM V15, IM V35) 5) 3
Shaft exten‐ Balancing
sion (DE)
Plain shaft --- 0
Fitted key Full-key 1
Fitted key Half-key 2
Bearings Vibration se‐ Shaft and
verity acc. to flange accuracy
Siemens/EN
60034-14
Standard with R/A R B
locating bearing
Standard with S/A R C
locating bearing
Standard with SR/A R D
location bear‐
ing1)
Standard R/A R G

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

174 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Descriptions (data position in Article No.)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16 - Z
Standard S/A R H
Advanced Life‐ S/A R Q
time 6)
Power connec‐ Cable entry Signal connection (looking onto DE)
tion
Terminal box Right DE A
(top)
Terminal box Left DE B
(top)
Terminal box NDE Left C
(top)
Version
Version for potentially explosive atmospheres Zone 2 M03
Version for potentially explosive atmospheres Zone 22 M39
In the version for hazardous areas zone 2 and zone 22, the following options are not possible: Z

A12, A25, G14, K80, L74, Q12, U60, U61, U62, U63, U65, U66, U67, U68, Y64,

1) Only possible if the 8th data position is "1" (induction version)

2) Limited to nmax = 12,000 r/min
3) Limited to nmax = 9000 r/min
4) Limited to nmax = 4600 r/min
5) Only possible for shaft height 100, 132, and 160.
6) Limited to nmax = 5000 r/min, shaft height 132: nmax = 4500 r/min, shaft height 160: nmax = 4000 r/min
Motors for hazardous areas have been released for SINAMICS S120 or SINAMICS G120
converters (version with PM 240). Carefully comply with the following constraints when
operating the motors with third-party converters:
• Converters/inverters with pulse width modulation (PWM)
• The pulse clock frequency must be at least 4 kHz
• Converter output voltage according to the following table

Line supply voltage Line Module (line-side converter/inverter infeed type) Converter output voltage 1)
3 AC 400 V Smart Line Module (SLM) unregulated 380 V
Active Line Module (ALM) regulated 425 V
3 AC 480 V Smart Line Module (SLM) unregulated 460 V
Active Line Module (ALM) regulated 500 V
1)
Minimum output voltage required for motor operation in order to achieve data according to
the data sheet.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 175
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

The rated powers for motors for use in hazardous zones are reduced both in S1 and S6 duty
in relation to the non-explosion protected version (standard version). The deratings are taken
into account in the rating plate data:

Article No. Version Derating

1PH8xxx-1xx1x-xxx1-Z, M03, or M39 Induction, forced ventilation 10 %
1PH8xxx-1xx2x-xxx1-Z, M03, or M39 Induction, water cooling 20 %
1PH8xxx-2xx1x-xxx1-Z, M03, or M39 Synchronous, forced ventilation 20 %
1PH8xxx-2xx2x-xxx1-Z, M03, or M39 Synchronous, water cooling 20 %

In hazardous areas of Zone 2 (option M03), for induction motor versions, reduce the
permissible maximum speeds (nmax):

Article No. Version Maximum speed nmax

1PH810x-1xxxx-xxx1-Z, M03 Induction 4350 r/min
1PH813x-1xxxx-xxx1-Z, M03 Induction 3000 r/min
1PH816x-1xxxx-xxx1-Z, M03 Induction 2250 r/min

The motors with forced ventilation have newly developed separately driven fans for use in
hazardous areas. These are in conformance with the applicable directives and standards. Take
the modified dimensions from dimension drawings (SIEMENS Product Configurator).
The supply values for the separately driven fans are specified in the following table:

Article No. Max. current consumption at

3 AC 400 V / 50 Hz 3 AC 400 V / 60 Hz 3 AC 480 V / 60 Hz
(±10 %) (±10 %) (±10 %)
A A A
1PH810x-1xx1x-xxx1-Z, M03 or M39 0.16 0.13 0.16
1PH813x-1xx1x-xxx1-Z, M03 or M39 0.25 0.22 0.27
1PH813x-2xx1x-xxx1-Z, M03 or M39
1PH816x-1xx1x-xxx1-Z, M03 or M39 0.25 0.22 0.27
1PH816x-2xx1x-xxx1-Z, M03 or M39

Note
All of the separately driven fans are equipped with 3-phase motors.

Operating conditions for shaft heights 100 to 160

When operating SIMOTICS M-1PH8 motors in Zone 2 or Zone 22 hazardous areas, carefully take
into consideration the following application conditions:
• Provide specific operating instructions for the motors for when they are used in hazardous
areas (see link and documentation in the Intranet/Internet).
• Motor versions for use in hazardous areas are not UL-approved. As a consequence, these
motors do not bear the cUR marking.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

176 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

• Zone 2 (option M03):

– Marking: II 3 G Ex nA IIB T3 Gc -15 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +40 °C
– Device group II, category 3G, temperature class T3
– EN 60079-15: 2010 type of protection "nA" (no sparking)
– Use in ambient temperatures -15 °C up to +40 °C at installation altitudes up to 1000 m
– Motors with forced ventilation comply with the requirements for a low risk class with
reference to shock resistance tests carried out at the fan housing.
– Motors, Category 3G, are intended for use in hazardous Zone 2. In hazardous Zone 2, the
occurrence of an explosive atmosphere is improbable; however, if it does occur in normal
operation, then only very infrequently and only very briefly. A potentially explosive
atmosphere can comprise, for example, of air and flammable gases, vapors or mist.
– According to standard EN 60079-14, the ignition temperature of the potentially explosive
gas atmosphere must be higher than 200 °C (temperature class T3).
• Zone 22 (option M39):
– Marking: II 3D Ex tc IIIB T160 °C Dc IP55 -15 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +40 °C
– Device group II, category 3D
– Protection afforded by the enclosure tc, degree of protection IP55
– EN 60079-31: 2014 Protection afforded by the enclosure
– Maximum surface temperature 160 °C (according to EN 60079-0: 2012 general
requirements)
– Use in ambient temperatures -15 °C up to +40 °C at installation altitudes up to 1000 m
– Motors with forced ventilation comply with the requirements for a low risk class with
reference to shock resistance tests carried out at the fan housing.
– Motors, Category 3D, are intended for use in hazardous Zone 22 (non-conductive dust).
In hazardous Zone 22, the occurrence of an explosive atmosphere is improbable;
however, if it does occur in normal operation, then only very infrequently and only very
briefly. The potentially explosive atmosphere comprises a mixture of dust and air.
– According to standard EN 60079-14, the ignition temperature of a dust cloud must be
50 % higher than the maximum surface temperature of the equipment being used. In this
case, the ignition temperature of a dust cloud must be > 240 °C. The ignition temperature
of a layer of dust with a maximum thickness of 5 mm must be 75 Kelvin higher than the
maximum surface temperature of the motor. In this case, the ignition temperature of a
dust cloud must be > 235 °C.
• Evaluate the temperature sensor embedded in the motor winding.
• Set the tripping temperature of the sensor to 135 °C.
• Safely and reliably shut down explosion protected separately driven fans when an overload
condition occurs. PTC sensors are integrated as standard for overload protection, which must
be evaluated according to EN 60079-14. Alternatively, a suitable motor circuit breaker can be
used for overload protection.
• The explosion-protected, forced ventilated and water-cooled SIMOTICS M-1PH8 motors have
degree of protection IP55.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 177
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

• Attach the twist protection provided for the signal connector in compliance with regulations.
• Use Ex-certified cable glands for the power connection. Close and seal unused threads using
Ex-certified screw plugs.
• The thermal stability of the connecting cables must be at least 80 °C. Plastic-insulated,
flexible cables must have the same durability as heavy-duty, rubber-insulated cables.
SIEMENS MOTION-CONNECT power and signal cables meet these requirements.
• The motors have a ground connection at the bearing shield/enclosure. Additionally ground
the motors at this connection point.
• Belt drives are only permissible if buildup of a static charge is ruled out in the machinery.
• Do not repaint/touch up explosion-proof motors. However, if this is required, then comply
with the following requirements:
– Limit the surface resistance of the paint used: Surface resistance ≤ 1 GΩ for motors
belonging to device group III
– Breakdown voltage ≤ 4 kV for device group III
• Contact Technical Support (Chapter "Introduction") for the correct paint structure.

Note
For additional information, please contact Technical Support or your local sales partner.

Design criteria for shaft heights 180 to 225

The motors with option M39 can be selected with the following article number suffix.
1PH818x-1Ax1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH818x-1Ex1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH818x-1Hx1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH818x-1Jx1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH818x-1Mx1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH822x-1Ax1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH822x-1Ex1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH822x-1Hx1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH822x-1Jx1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
1PH822x-1Mx1x-xxx1-Z, Z=M39
The listed motors cannot be supplied with the Performance bearings (14th data position =
"L").
1PH8 motors, shaft heights 180 and 225 with option M39 are implemented with insulated
NDE bearings as standard.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

178 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

The supply values for the separately driven fans are specified in the following table:

Article No. Max. current consumption at

3 AC 400 V (±10 %); 3 AC 400 V (±10 %); 3 AC 480 V (+5 % / -10 %);
50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz
A A A
1PH818☐- 0.6 0.65 0.6
1PH822☐- 1.6 1.3 1.5

Note
All of the separately driven fans are equipped with 3-phase motors.

Operating conditions for shaft heights 180 and 225

Carefully take into account the following operating conditions when operating motors in a Zone
22 hazardous area:
• Provide specific operating instructions for the motors for when they are used in hazardous
areas (see link and documentation in the Intranet/Internet).
• Zone 22 (option M39):
– Marking: II 3D Ex tc IIIB T155 °C Dc IP55 -15 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +40 °C
– Device group II, category 3D
– Protection afforded by the enclosure, tc
– Maximum surface temperature 155 °C (according to EN 60079-0: 2012 general
requirements)
– Use in ambient temperatures -15 °C up to +40 °C at installation altitudes up to 1000 m
• Evaluate the temperature sensor embedded in the motor winding.
• Safely and reliably shut down explosion protected separately driven fans when an overload
condition occurs. PTC sensors are integrated as standard for overload protection, which must
be evaluated according to EN 60079-14.
• Attach the twist protection provided for the signal connector in compliance with regulations.
• Use Ex-certified cable glands for the power connection. Close and seal unused threads using
Ex-certified screw plugs.
• The thermal stability of the connecting cables must be at least 80 °C. Plastic-insulated,
flexible cables must have the same durability as heavy-duty, rubber-insulated cables.
SIEMENS MOTION-CONNECT power and signal cables meet these requirements.
• The motors have a ground connection at the bearing shield/enclosure. Additionally ground
the motors at this connection point.
• Belt drives are only permissible if buildup of a static charge is ruled out in the machinery.
• Keep the motors free of dust layers > 5 mm.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 179
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

• The type of construction IM V5 is only permissible with a protective roof (protection from
falling parts)
• Do not repaint/touch up explosion-proof motors. However, if this is required, then comply
with the following requirements:
– Limit the surface resistance of the paint used: Surface resistance ≤ 1 GΩ for motors
belonging to device group III
– Breakdown voltage ≤ 4 kV for device group III
Contact Technical Support (Chapter "Introduction") for the correct paint structure.

Note
For additional information, please contact Technical Support or your local sales partner.

5.2.4 Increased resistance to vibration (option L03)

Overview
1PH8 motors with shaft heights 180 and 225 and with the option L03 can be used in compliance
with certain operating conditions for applications with an increased vibration load. Possible
applications, for example on servo presses.

Design criteria for shaft heights 180 and 225

In conjunction with the option L03, the following motors can be selected:
1PH818x-1Ax00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Ax10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Ex00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Ex10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Hx00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Hx10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Jx00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Jx10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Mx00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-1Mx10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-2Ex00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-2Ex10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-2Mx00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH818x-2Mx10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Ax00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

180 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

1PH822x-1Ax10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Ex00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Ex10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Hx00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Hx10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Jx00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Jx10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Mx00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-1Mx10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-2Ex00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-2Ex10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-2Mx00-xxx1-Z, Z=L03
1PH822x-2Mx10-xxx1-Z, Z=L03

Operating conditions of shaft heights 180 and 225

The vibration load that is permissible by default for the 1PH8 main motors is described in Chapter
"Vibration response." Take the maximum permissible vibration acceleration rates in conjunction
with option L03 from the following table:

Table 5-14 Maximum permissible vibration accelerations

Standard Option L03 Option L03

SH 180 and SH 225 SH 180 SH 225
Vertical 1.0 g 4.0 g 3.5 g
Horizontal 1.0 g 3.5 g 3.2 g
Axial 1.0 g 3.5 g 3.2 g

Vibration acceleration rates (0 peak) in the frequency range from 0 Hz to 1 kHz at the
bearings must not exceed the values listed in the table. The position of the measuring points
is defined in ISO 10816-1. The customer must pin the 1PH8 motor at the DE and NDE using
a cylindrical grooved pin according to ISO 8740. To do this, place the motor down on a metal
foundation. For easier removal, do not use blind holes in the foundation for the pinning.
Recommendation: Through holes for pressing through the cylindrical grooved pins.

Grooved pins acc. to ISO 8740 SH 180 SH 225

Grooved pin diameter 5 mm 6 mm

Measures included
• Reinforced version of a DE bearing shield
• Fan unit (EC fan) with upgraded electronic components
• Screws locked with Loctite 270

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 181
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Otherwise, the statements and regulations in this Configuration Manual apply.

Note
For additional information, please contact Technical Support or your local sales partner.

5.2.5 Holding brake (option)

5.2.5.1 Properties

Operation with holding brake on the SINAMICS S

The SINAMICS S drive system has various types of brake control. A detailed description of the
individual functions and corresponding parameter assignment information is provided in the
following manuals:
• SINAMICS S120 Function Manual (6SL3097-4AB00-0AP1)
• SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (6SL3097-4AP00-0AP3)
Information on the current carrying capacity of the brake outputs/adapters of the individual
SINAMICS power units can be found in the corresponding manuals. It may be necessary to
control the brake using additional switching elements.
Ensure that the brake data are correctly parameterized in SINAMICS. This is particularly
important for the setting values:
• Maximum motor speed (reduced value for the "holding brake" option)
• Opening and closing times of the holding brake
• Moment of inertia of the holding brake
The corresponding setting values are listed for the specific brakes in the "Technical data of the
holding brake" table.

Functional principle of the holding brake

A brake can be mounted at the DE side of 1PH8 motors, shaft heights 80, 100, 132, 160, 180 and
225.
These brakes are electromagnetic units for dry-running operation. An electromagnetic field
is used to release the brake which is applied using spring force. They function according to
the closed-circuit principle, i.e. when in a no-current state, the spring-actuated brake closes
and holds the drive. When power is applied to the brake, it is released and the drive is free to
rotate.
In the event of a power failure or an Emergency Stop, the drive is braked from its actual
speed down to standstill.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

182 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Brake connection (must be provided on the system side)

• Alternating voltage 230 VAC, 50 ... 60 Hz
• 24 V DC up to shaft height 160
Ambient temperature
The brake module is designed for an ambient temperature of -5° C to +40° C. At temperatures
below -5° C and longer periods without power being applied to the brake, then it cannot
be excluded that the friction disk freezes. In this case, contact the manufacturer regarding
special measures that are required.

Note
Restricted maximum motor speed for a motor equipped with brake
The maximum speed of a motor with holding brake is limited to the maximum speed of the
holding brake (see nmax, Br speed specified in the characteristic curves).

Note
Selection and ordering data
The selection and ordering data is contained in the chapter of the same name.

Note
No UL approval for the holding brakes for 1PH8, shaft heights 180 and 225
The holding brakes for motors, shaft heights 180 and 225 are not UL approved. As a
consequence, these motors with mounted brake do not have the cUR marking.

Technical data of the holding brakes

Table 5-15 Technical data of the mounted holding brake (DE) with emergency stop function

Shaft height 80 100 132 160 180 225

Motor type 1PH808□ 1PH810□ 1PH813□ 1PH816□ 1PH818□ 1PH822□
Brake type Size 13 Size 19 Size 24 Size 29 NFF-A 63 NFF-A 100
Holding torque 29 60...15 140...310 280...500 1000 1600
Nm
Maximum speed nmax 5000 5000 4500 4000 3500 3100
r/min
Moment of inertia JB 0.00093 0.0048 0.0141 0.0266 0.022 0.051
kgm 2

Weight mBr 10 21 46 66 63 88
kg
Coil current 230 V AC 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.9 2.2 2.7
±10 %
A

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 183
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Shaft height 80 100 132 160 180 225

Coil current, 24 V DC 4.1 4.7 6.9 6.7 - -
±10 %
A
Permitted single-use 2.2 7 16 24 98 210
operating energy WE
kJ
Total moment of iner‐ 0.0174 0.063 0.218 0.456 13 3.9
tia (Emergency Stop)
Jtot
kgm2
Emergency stop speed 4800 4500 3600 3100 3000 2800
n
r/min
Number of emergency 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1200
stops z 1)
Opening time t0 150 500 650 750 300 300
ms
Closing time tC1 2) 300 500 1000 1100 80 100
ms (40) (60) (100) (150)
1)
Max. 3 switching operations per hour
2)
Closing time at 230 V AC (the time in brackets refers to the closing time for a 24 V DC power supply, and the reduced closing
time when using a DC circuit with 230 V AC power supply)

&XUUHQW,
%UDNHRSHQHG

W F W
W

W
 RSHQLQJWLPH W
F FORVLQJWLPH

Figure 5-3 Terminology (time) for holding operation

Explanation of terminology in the table

Holding torque Nm: on motors with shaft heights 100 ... 160, the holding torque can be
continuously set in the specified value range using an adjusting ring. The dynamic braking
torque is approximately 70 % of the set holding torque.
Speed nmax r/min: Maximum permissible speed.
Permitted single-use operating energy WE kJ: Permissible operating energy for an
emergency stop,
WE = Jtot. x n2/182.4 x 10-3 (J in kgm2, n in r/min)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

184 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Lifetime operating energy Wmax MJ: Max. possible switching energy of the brake (for
emergency stop) until the brake linings have to be replaced, Wmax = WE x z
Number of emergency stops z: The specified number of emergency stops refers to the
specified conditions. A conversion can be made for operation under different conditions:
Number of EMERGENCY STOPs z = Wmax/WE
Coil current A: Current to release the brake.
Opening time t0 ms: Separating time until the brake opens (the specified values refer to the
maximum braking torque and at rated voltage).
Closing time tC1 ms: Interlocking time until the brake closes according to diagram
"Terminology (time) for holding operation." (the values refer to the maximum braking torque
and at rated voltage.).

Use for the intended purpose

"Single-disk spring-operated brake control modules" are for mounting on induction or
synchronous motors and intended for use in commercial or industrial systems. Use in hazardous
areas is absolutely prohibited. The integrated single-disk spring-operated brake
(electromagnetically opening system) is designed as holding brake. Occasional Emergency Stop
operations are possible.

NOTICE
Irreversible reduction of the braking effect
The braking effect can be irreversibly reduced if you do not comply with the permissible number
of braking operations per hour and/or the maximum permissible operating energy per hour.
Further, this can have a negative impact on the function of the holding brake.
• When setting up machines and systems (when using the jog mode), carefully observe the
information provided in the Table "Technical data of holding brakes".
• You can equip the holding brake with a manual brake release to remove the holding torque.

NOTICE
Inadvertent operation of the holding brake
Material damage can occur if you inadvertently apply or release the holding brake.
• Secure the holding brake against inadvertent operation and misuse. The mechanical
manual brake release must be in the center position when not actuated (see the diagram
“Spring-actuated single-disk brake module"). Only then is the brake completely closed, and
it is ensured that the spring-actuated single-disk brake module can provide its full braking
effect.
• You can remove the manual release lever. Strictly observe the specific system-related
regulations, e.g. in the crane construction area relating to whether manual brake release is
permissible.
• For the rated operating conditions, see DIN VDE 0580: 1994-10. For the degree of
protection see DIN VDE 0470, part 1. If deviations exist, coordinate special measures with
the manufacturer.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 185
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

WARNING
Danger to life if the holding brake is used incorrectly
If you incorrectly use the holding brake, e.g. you use it as safety brake, this can lead to severe
accidents involving injury and/or material damage.
• Depending on the particular application, strictly observe the appropriate accident
prevention regulations.

Note
Special measures
If you find references to special measures and/or it is necessary to consult the manufacturer,
already obtain the manufacturer's advice when you configure the system.

5.2.5.2 Mounted holding brake for SH 80 to SH 160

Properties
The holding brakes for motors, shaft heights 80, 100, 132 and 160 are brake modules
(manufactured by Kendrion Binder Magnete) with their own bearings, flange and shaft
extension. The dimensions of the flange and shaft extension of the brake module are identical
with those of the motor. If a motor is to be equipped with a brake, then a motor version with a
flange-type of construction and a smooth shaft (without keyway and key) is used. The shaft of
the brake module can then be shrunk onto the motor shaft (thermal technique). It can be
released using pressurized oil. The brake module is bolted to the motor flange.

Note
Radial and axial forces
The specifications for the "standard" bearing version apply for the permissible radial and axial
forces.

See also
Radial and axial force diagrams (Page 117)

Method of operation
The brake module is an electromagnetic component with integrated electromagnetically
opening single-disk spring-operated brake for dry running, in which the braking effect is applied
by the spring force and canceled electromagnetically.
If required, the braking effect can also be canceled by an additional mounted manual release.
The brake module is a mounted brake, preferably on the DE end shield of electric motors, as
built-on unit with bearing supported driver pin shaft.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

186 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Structure
The solenoid housing ⑦ with the cast excitation winding ⑥ is used to accommodate the
armature ②, the friction disk ③ and the flange ④ that is attached using cylinder head screws.
The compression springs in the solenoid housing that are supported via the thrust studs (size 13)
on the adjustment ring ⑨, apply a force to the friction disk via the anchor in the axial direction
and thus clamp the friction disk between the rigidly mounted flange and the anchor and produce
the braking effect (torque). The tangent torque support of the armature against the solenoid
housing is performed by the dowel pins.
When a direct voltage is applied to the excitation winding, the resulting electromagnetic
force pulls the armature against the force of the compression springs, the friction disk is
released and thus the braking effect canceled.
As the brake module represents a self-contained system, no forces are applied externally.
The braking effect of the axial moving friction disk is transmitted to the driver pin shaft ⑧
fixed to the motor shaft via the keyed connection of the internal square socket (sizes 13, 19
and 24) and/or via internal gearing (size 29).
The ball bearing located between the solenoid housing and the driver pin shaft is used to
center the brake to the driver pin shaft and therefore to the motor shaft when mounting
the brake on the motor flange and also to absorb the transverse forces acting radially on the
driver pin shaft.
The ball bearing comes sealed from the factory. As additional protection against pollution
and to prevent grease from a defective ball bearing seal reaching the friction disk, a sealing
ring is mounted that prevents dirt, grease or oil reaching the area of the friction disk from the
outside and abraded particles due to the wear of the friction disk escaping.
The sealing ring provides the drive-side sealing between the flange and the driver pin shaft.
The single-disk spring-operated brake module can be opened mechanically by hand, e.g. in
the event of a power failure, via the optional manual release ①. The electrical connection is
established directly in the terminal box ⑤.
The transmissible torque of the brake module can be set via the adjustment ring.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 187
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

5
1

7
6 2

① Manual brake release, optional ⑥ Winding

② Armature ⑦ Housing
③ Friction disk ⑧ Shaft
④ Flange ⑨ Adjustment ring (not for 1PH808)
⑤ Terminal box
Figure 5-4 Single-disk spring-operated brake module 77 500...B15

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

188 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

0LFURVZLWFK 'LUHFWLRQ
1
$ %
&
1 2 3 4 5 6

%UDNHZLWKPLFURVZLWFK
7 8

① Oval head screw (2x) ⑤ Bracket

② Cylinder head screw (2x) ⑥ Hexagon bolt M2.5x8 (not included in the scope of
delivery)
③ Bellows ⑦ Dowel pin
④ Bolt ⑧ Microswitch
Figure 5-5 Microswitch mounting of a single-disk spring-operated brake module 77 500...B15

Electrical connection

WARNING
Fire hazard and risk of destroying the brake module
The brake module is an electromagnetic component and a DC system. An impermissibly high
connection voltage at the brake module can cause the rectifier or the winding to burn. This can
block the brake module, causing it to overheat.
If the connection voltage is too low, the magnetic excitation will also be too low, preventing the
brake from being released. The brake goes into the brake mechanism although this is not
wanted.
• Make sure that the connection voltage of the brake module remains within the permissible
tolerance of +10 % to -10 % of the nominal voltage. Comply with the legal standards for
connection to the grid. Pay attention to the correct dimensioning of the cable lengths and
conductor cross-sections in the connection cables.

• Check the electrical connection of the holding brake based on the following checklist.

Table 5-16 Checklist for checking the electrical connection of the holding brake

Check OK
The connection cables are suitable for the type of use and the voltages and currents that occur.
The connection cables are connected correctly by means of screws, clamps or other equivalent means, so
that the electrical connection is maintained permanently.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 189
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Check OK
Adequately dimensioned connecting cables, torsion, strain and shear relief as well as anti-kink protection are
provided for the connection cables.
The protective conductor (only for protection class I) is connected at the grounding point.
There is no foreign matter, dirt or moisture in the terminal box.
Unused cable entries and the terminal box itself are sealed so that the specified degree of protection ac‐
cording to EN 60529 is maintained.

5 5.1 5.2 5.3

⑤ Terminal box
5.1 Cover
5.2 Connecting terminal or rectifier
5.3 Fixing screw for cover
Figure 5-6 Holding brake terminal box ⑤ optionally with terminal or rectifier

• Connect the spring-applied single-disk brake module to the direct voltage. Use a rectifier
bridge or half-wave rectifier for electrical connection to an AC power system.
• For brakes with integrated rectifiers, you can connect the spring-applied single-disk brake
module directly to alternating voltage.
• See the figure for the terminal assignment.
• For brakes with a connecting terminal, you must connect the brake module directly to direct
voltage. Connect the customer-specific connection cable to the terminals or to the integrated
rectifier. Use a screwed cable gland (M16 x 1.5) for the connection.
• You must remove the cover of the terminal box to connect the individual cores of the
connecting cable to the connecting terminals or to the terminals of the integrated rectifier.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

190 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Table 5-17 Rectifier for operation on single-phase AC with electrical connection via connection
terminal (5.2)

Type Method Rated input voltage Output voltage Max. output current
range U2 DC
U1 AC (40 ... 60 Hz) I DC
V V R load L load
A A
32 07332B40 Half- 0 ... 500 (±10 %) U1 · 0.445 1.6 2.0
wave

Brakes with integrated rectifiers are either equipped with a half-wave rectifier or with a
rectifier bridge.
By appropriately connecting the integrated rectifier, you switch between AC (normal
interlocking time t1) or DC (short interlocking time t1).

1RUPDOLQWHUORFNLQJWLPHW 6KRUWHQHGLQWHUORFNLQJWLPHW

1 1

1 %UDNHZLQGLQJ :LWK'&VLGHVZLWFKLQJ
$&VLGHVZLWFKLQJ
PXVWDOVREHSHUIRUPHG

Figure 5-7 Pin assignment of the rectifier

Voltage ripples caused by switched-mode power supplies can cause humming or unintended
behavior of the component depending on the size and torque.
The user or the system manufacturer has to ensure proper operation by means of the
electrical control.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 191
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

DC connection
The basic curve of the voltage when the excitation winding (coil) (1.2) is switched off is as
follows.

0
0
;0

W
W
W
8

8%

89PD[

UB Operating voltage (coil voltage)

U Transient voltage
Figure 5-8 Basic curve of the voltage when turning off the excitation winding

NOTICE
Overvoltages when switching off
The voltage peak UVmax when switching off can reach several 1000 V in the millisecond range
without a protective circuit.
The excitation winding (coil) (1.2), switching contacts and electronic components can be
destroyed.
Sparks form at the switch on switch-off.
• When it is switched off, the current must therefore be reduced via a snubber circuit. This also
limits the voltages. The maximum permissible overvoltage when switching off must not
exceed 1500 V.

If Kendrion Binder rectifiers are used, the protective circuit for the internal electronic
components and for the excitation winding (coil) (1.2) is integrated. This does not apply

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

192 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

for the external contacts required for the DC-side switching because the galvanic isolation of
the external contact is then no longer achieved.

NOTICE
Component damage resulting from a lower voltage
Sensitive electronic components (e.g. logic components) and mechanical contact elements
can also be damaged by the lower voltage.
• Make sure that the voltage does not fall below the specified value, e.g. due to insufficient
conductor cross-sections.

AC connection

NOTICE
Impermissible overvoltages
If you operate the brake module without a snubber circuit in a circuit on the DC side,
impermissible overvoltages can arise.
• Use a snubber circuit.
• Avoid damage, e.g. due to contact erosion or contact welding of the external contact
elements by taking additional protection measures, e.g. varistors or spark suppression
elements.

Direct connection to an AC voltage is only possible via a rectifier. Depending on the

connection method (DC or AC operation), different interlocking times can be achieved.
• Half-wave rectification
With half-wave rectification, the coil voltage U2 is less than the input voltage on the rectifier
by a factor of 0.445. Half-wave rectifiers have a high residual ripple which have somewhat
shorter switching times compared to the bridge rectification, depending on the module size.
The half-wave rectifier is therefore preferable (also because of the smaller coil voltages).
However, humming can occur in brake modules of small size.
• DC operation
With DC-side circuitry of the brake module, an additional auxiliary contact is plugged into the
motor contactor, which interrupts the current supply to the brake module on the DC side.

Electrical connection of brake modules with microswitches

Note
Use of microswitches
• Observe the special regulations regarding the permissible use of microswitches, e.g. for
lifting gear and crane construction.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 193
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

WARNING
Accidental motor starting
In an unsecured motor circuit, the motor can start accidentally when the microswitch is closed.
This can result in injury and/or material damage.
• Secure the motor circuit accordingly.

In brake modules with microswitches, the microswitch monitors the operating state of the
spring-applied single-disk brake module. The brake module is either open or closed.
• For example, integrate the microswitch into the control circuit for controlling the machine or
the motor.
The microswitch prevents the machine or motor from starting against a closed brake module
if it is integrated correctly.
When ordering, the microswitch is available as an option. It is not possible to subsequently
mount a microswitch.
When the brake module is supplied, the microswitch is adjusted in the factory.

Manual opening of the brake module

WARNING
Accidental drive acceleration after manually operating the brake control module
If you manually open the spring-applied single-disk brake module, the load torque will
accelerate an unbalanced drive. This can result in injury and/or material damage.
• Take special care when inching the brake module open or closed. Make sure that no danger
is posed by the load torque.

Examples of situations in which manual operation of the brake module is necessary include
• Maintenance on the machine or the motor
• Failure of the regular power supply during UPS operation
The spring-applied single-disk brake module can be manually opened via an externally
mounted mechanical manual brake release (accessory).
If you use a commercially available UPS power supply, e.g. a UPS battery system, the brake
module can be opened electrically during a failure of the regular power supply.
• Observe the voltage stated on the nameplate of the brake module when installing a UPS
power supply.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

194 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Setting of the transmissible torque M4

Note
Torque M4
The transmissible torque must not fall below the minimum value M4 when you adjust the
adjustment ring according to table "Change of the transmissible torque."

• Always mark the modified adjustment ring distance E in the base of the solenoid housing
pocket using a punch prick.
• Mark the theoretically set transmissible torque M4 on the nameplate of the motor. The empty
field "Optional customer information" on the nameplate is available for this.
• After you have set the transmissible torque M4, make sure that you secure the adjustment
ring with a threaded pin. Comply with the tightening torque of MA = 3 Nm.
• Turn the adjustment ring in such a way that the threaded pin can be located between the
thrust studs. Deviations of the transmissible torque M4 from -5% to +15% are possible.
The brake module is delivered with the transmissible torque M4 set to the default value
according to the data sheet. You will find the transmissible torque M4 on the nameplate of
the brake module.

Table 5-18 Change of the transmissible torque M4 [%] for an axial travel path of the adjustment ring
by 1 mm; transmissible torque (default value) M4

Size 19 Size 24 Size 29

Change of the transmissible torque ΔM4/mm Approx. 15 Approx. 12 Approx. 14
%
Transmissible torque (standard value) M4 150 310 500
Nm

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 195
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

5.2.5.3 Mounted holding brake for SH 180 and SH 225

Properties
For these motors, the brake (manufactured by Stromag) is mounted on the DE end shield. In this
case, the motor shaft is extended using a shrunk-on stub shaft. The torque is transmitted
through a feather key according to DIN 6885/1. The stub shaft can also be axially secured using
a spring washer and a central screw (M20). The holding brake does not have its own bearings.
The output forces are therefore absorbed by the motor bearings. Belt pulleys cannot be mounted
due to space reasons and also due to the high associated cantilever forces. When selecting the
coupling to couple to the motor - brake combination - it should be carefully noted that the shaft
extension diameter is larger than the diameter of the motor shaft extension. REVOLEX bolt-type
couplings 2LF6337 for shaft height 180 and 2LF6338 for shaft height 225 should be preferably
used. Ordering data and dimensions, refer to catalog M 11 or D 81.1.

Note
Radial and axial forces
The specifications for the "standard" bearing version apply for the permissible radial and axial
forces.

See also
Radial and axial forces (Page 113)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

196 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

Design, method of operation and construction features

1 Coil form with coil 40 Screw for tacho flange

2 Friction disk with friction lining 41 Fixing screw
3 Terminal box, complete 42 Cylinder head screw
4 Manual brake release, complete 46 Fixing screw for manual release cover
10 Armature disk 47 Screw for sliding block
11 Brake flange 49 Emergency release screw
12 Tacho flange 50 Screw plug for emergency release
13 Socket 52 Screw for blockable manual release
14 Adjustment ring 60 O-ring for tacho
15 Pinion 61 O-ring for brake flange
20 Shim 63 Lock nut for microswitch
21 Compression springs 64 Grub screw (microswitch)
22 Sliding block 65 Screw plug for air gap measurement
23 Spacer for terminal box 67 Screw connection
24 Spring bolt 73 Rating plate
25 Manual release cover 74 Pin (rating plate mounting)
26 Eccentric bolt 76 Adhesive
27 Deep-groove ball bearing 78 Washer for item 52
28 Microswitch 81 Sealing ring for item 50
Figure 5-9 Mounting of holding brake SH 180 and SH 225

The NFF brake is a spring-loaded electromagnetic twin-disk brake that brakes in the de-
energized state and releases electromagnetically.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 197
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

The NFF brake type satisfies the highest requirements for fatigue strength, robustness
and resistance to sea water. The brakes are constructed and tested in compliance with
DIN VDE 0580.
The brake is attached to a motor or another machine part using cylinder head screws (fixing
screws, item 41).
The bobbin contains a coil that is permanently encapsulated in synthetic resin of thermal
class 155 (F, max. temperature limit 155° C).
When the coil is de-energized, the compression springs (21) press the armature disk (10)
axially against the friction disk with friction lining (2). This is clamped between the armature
disk (10) and the brake flange (11) and thus prevented from rotating. The braking effect is
transmitted to the shaft from the friction disk with friction lining (2) via the pinion (15) and a
feather key.
If the coil is connected to a rated DC voltage according to the specifications on the rating
plate (73), the armature disk (10) is pulled against the spring pressure to the coil form (1)
through the electromagnetic force. The friction disk with friction lining (2) is therefore freed
and the braking effect is canceled. The brake is released.

Mechanical release using the manual release bar

By pulling the manual release bar (4) through approx. 30° against the rear side of the brake, the
armature disk (10) is pulled axially against the coil form (1) and the friction disk with friction
lining (2) is then free.

WARNING
Incorrect use of the emergency release
If you use the emergency release to maintain operation temporarily, you may damage the
brake. This can result in personal injury and damage to property.
• Only ever use the emergency release in an emergency.

Power supply line and electrical connection of the brake

The electrical connection must be made in compliance with the installation regulations (e.g. DIN
92). The power connection provided by the customer is 230 V AC +/- 10%.
The coil is dimensioned for the DC voltage specified on the rating plate (residual ripple < 0.5)
and 100% cyclic duration. The continuously permissible voltage change is +6% to -10% of the
rated voltage.
To protect the coil or the power supply, a varistor of the appropriate operating voltage range
and the required power should be connected to the coil input.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

198 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

&RQQHFWLRQVIURPWKHEUDNHVLGH
 &RLO
&RQQHFWLRQGLDJUDPLQWKHWHUPLQDOER[
 +HDWLQJ
 0LFURVZLWFK
JUHHQEURZQZKLWH

&RQQHFWLRQVIURPWKHFXVWRPHU VVLGH
/1 9$&
 '&VZLWFK
 +HDWLQJ
 0LFURVZLWFK
ZKLWHEURZQJUHHQ

12FRQWDFW 1&FRQWDFW
:LUHMXPSHU
1RWLFH7HUPLQDOVDQGPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIRU
$&VLGHRSHUDWLRQ

Figure 5-10 Circuit configurations

$&VLGHRSHUDWLRQ '&VLGHRSHUDWLRQ
12FRQWDFWDQG1&FRQWDFW
0LFURVZLWFK
&RQQHFWLRQRSWLRQ
+HDWLQJ
+HDWLQJRQ9$&
ZVEUJQ ZVEUJQ

3( &RLO 3( &RLO
%UDNH %UDNH

7KH3(FRQGXFWRUPXVWEH
FRQQHFWHGWRWKHJURXQGLQWKH
9$& WHUPLQDOER[ 9$&

'&VZLWFK
Figure 5-11 Circuit configurations

Version with microswitch

If monitoring of the switching state is required for a brake, a microswitch (28) can be used.
If the armature disk (10) is moved against the coil form (1) through the electromagnetic
force of the coil or through the mechanical emergency release, it actuates the microswitch
(28) via the grub screw (64).
The microswitch (28) can be integrated as an NC or NO contact in an electrical control or
monitoring circuit.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 199
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

5.2.6 Anti-condensation heating (option K45)

Larger motors are prone to more frequent condensation on the winding caused by the climatic
conditions because of the larger surfaces. Condensation can occur, for example, when motors
are not operational in a humid environment or if motors are exposed to significant temperature
fluctuations. Anti-condensation heaters heat the air in the motor by a few Kelvin above the
ambient temperature and thus prevent precipitation inside the motor.

For 1PH8 motors, using option K45, order anti-condensation heating for shaft heights 180,
225 and 280. Option K45 comprises an anti condensation heater attached to the winding
overhang with a heating power of 100 W for a supply voltage of 230 V AC (50/60 Hz). The 2
connection ends are routed into the main motor terminal box. Connect this via the auxiliary
terminal strip. The connection ends are marked "1HE1" and "1HE2".

Note:
• For shaft heights 180, 225, 280, the same strip heater is used.
• Do not switch on the anti-condensation heating while the motor is operational.
• The anti-condensation heaters for 1PH8 motors are UL-approved.
• In addition to the anti-condensation heating, for motors with degree of protection IP55,
always take into consideration the condensation drain holes (Chapter "Condensation drain
hole (option L12)").

5.2.7 Condensation drain hole (option L12)

In larger motors, there is a risk of condensation or accumulation of condensed water inside the
motor due to the climatic conditions. Condensation drain holes prevent the accumulation of a
damaging quantity of water in the motor. These are frequently used as the primary measure
against condensation as they are easy to implement in the design.
For 1PH8 motors, the condensation drain holes are located at the lowest point in the NDE
and DE end shields. As a consequence, they are only suitable for horizontal mounting in
types of construction IM B3, IM B5 and IM B35. The condensation drain holes for shaft heights
180 and 225 are provided with a special insert (drainage plug); this insert is not required for
shaft height 280.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

200 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options




① Water drainage hole

Figure 5-12 1PH8 motor with condensation drain holes

Table 5-19 1PH8 motors with condensation drain holes (optional)

Article No. Cooling Degree of pro‐ Required op‐ Comment

tection tion
1PH818x-xxx0 Forced ventila‐ IP 55 L12 Bearing shield NDE and DE
1PH818x-xxx1 tion
1PH822x-xxx0
1PH822x-xxx1
1PH828x-xxx1
1PH818x-xxx2 Water cooling IP 55 - NDE and DE bearing shield
1PH822x-xxx2 (condensation drain hole al‐
ways included as standard)
1PH828x-xxx2

Note
• Condensation drain holes are only used in motors with degree of protection IP 55.
For motors with degree of protection IP 23 (open-circuit ventilation), the open design does
not require condensation drain holes. It is not possible that a potentially damaging amount
of condensation can collect.
• Anti-condensation heating (see Chapter "Anti-condensation heating") can be used to
supplement condensation drain holes.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 201
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

5.2.8 Higher number of grounding terminals in the terminal box (Q00)

For option Q00 (higher number of grounding terminals in the terminal box), symmetrical power
cables with a grounding conductor split into 3 can be connected more easily in the terminal box
for high power ratings. For option Q00, the grounding bar in the terminal box has a higher
number of terminals.

Table 5-20 Definition of Q00 according to the type of terminal box:

Shaft height SH Terminal box type Number of terminals Number of terminals

(grounding) standard (grounding) option
Q00
280 1XB7712-P.. 4 x M16 12 x M6

Option Q00 has no influence on the dimension drawings, 3D drawings, and electrical
configuration. This is the reason that this option is not included in the SIEMENS Product
Configurator (SPC) nor in the TST.

Figure 5-13 Grounding bar with option Q00

5.2.9 Chain of PTC thermistors for alarm and trip (option A12)

Overview
In the 1PH8 motors, in addition to the standard temperature sensor in the stator winding (see
Ch. "Thermal motor protection"), a chain of PTC thermistors for alarm and trip can be ordered
with option A12.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

202 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Motor components and options
5.2 Options

The chain of PTC thermistors can also monitor the winding temperature. PTC thermistors are
thermistors that exhibit a sudden increase in resistance at a certain trigger temperature. The
trip units detect this resistance change and signal the trigger temperature. PTC thermistors
are standardized in DIN 44081.

Circuit design
Option A12 consists of two chains of PTC thermistors, each with 3 PTC thermistors for alarm and
trip. The chain of PTC thermistors is installed in the phase elements on the winding overhang.
The temperature difference between alarm and trip is 10 K.
The terminal designations for the two connection ends of the chain of PTC thermistors for
alarm are 1TP1 and 1TP2; the terminal designations for the two connection ends of the PTC
thermistor circuit for tripping are 2TP1 and 2TP2.
The circuit diagram and the terminal assignments are provided in the terminal box of the
1PH8 motor.

$ODUP 6KXWGRZQ
Figure 5-14 Chains of PTC thermistors option A12

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 203
Motor components and options
5.2 Options

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

204 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Configuration 6
6.1 Configuring software

6.1.1 TST engineering tool (TIA-Selection-Tool)

Description
The "Totally Integrated Automation Portal", subsequently called "TIA Portal", is a further
development of the SIZER engineering tool.
The TIA-Selection-Tool (TST) engineering tool supports you when dimensioning the hardware
and firmware components required for a drive application.
TST supports the following configuration steps:
• Configuring the power supply
• Designing the motor and gearbox, including calculation of mechanical transmission
elements
• Configuring the drive components
• Compiling the required accessories
• Selection of the line-side and motor-side power options
The configuration process produces the following results:
• A parts list of components required (Export to Excel)
• Technical specifications of the system
• Characteristic curves
• Comments on system reactions
• Design information of the drive and control components
• Energy considerations of the configured drive systems
The TIA Portal is available as cloud-based tool and can also be used offline.
You can find additional information that you can download in the Internet at TST (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109767888).

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 205
Configuration
6.2 Procedure when engineering

6.2 Procedure when engineering

6.2.1 SINAMICS configuring procedure

Motion Control
1PH8 motors are optimized for motion control applications. They execute linear or rotary
movements within a defined movement cycle. All movements must be performed in a time-
optimized manner. As a result of these considerations, 1PH8 motors must meet the following
requirements:
• High dynamic response, e.g. short rise times
• Capable of overload, i.e. high acceleration margin
• Wide control range, i.e. high resolution for precise positioning.
The following table "Configuring procedure" is applicable for induction, synchronous-
reluctance and synchronous motors.

General procedure when engineering

The function description of the machine provides the basis when engineering the drive
application. The components are selected according to physical interdependencies and the
selection process is usually carried out in the following sequence of steps:

Table 6-1 Planning

Step Description of configuration activity

1. Clarification of type of drive See the next
2. Definition of supplementary conditions and integration into an automation system chapter
3. Definition of the load, calculation of the maximum load torque and selection of the motor
4. Selection of the SINAMICS Motor Module See
5. Repetition of steps 3 and 4 for additional axes catalog
6. Calculation of the required DC link power and selection of the SINAMICS Line Module
7. Selection of the line-side options (main switch, fuses, line filters, etc.)
8. Specification of the required control performance and selection of the Control Unit, definition of
component cabling
9. Definition of other system components (e.g. braking resistors)
10. Calculation of the current demand of the 24 V DC supply for the components and specification
of the power supplies (SITOP devices, Control Supply Modules)
11. Selection of the components for the connection system
12. Configuration of drive line-up components
13. Calculation of the required cable cross sections for power supply and motor connections
14. Inclusion of mandatory installation clearances

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

206 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Configuration
6.2 Procedure when engineering

Clarification of the type of drive

The motor is selected on the basis of the required torque, which is defined by the application, e.g.
traveling drives, hoisting drives, test stands, centrifuges, paper and rolling mill drives, feed
drives or main spindle drives. Gearboxes to convert motion or to adapt the motor speed and
motor torque to the load conditions must also be considered.
As well as the load torque, which is determined by the application, the following mechanical
data is among those required to calculate the torque to be provided by the motor:
• Masses to be moved
• Diameter of the drive wheel
• Leadscrew pitch, gear ratios
• Frictional resistance
• Mechanical efficiency
• Traversing paths
• Maximum velocity
• Maximum acceleration and maximum deceleration
• Cycle time
A basic decision must be made as to whether induction, synchronous-reluctance or synchronous
motors should be used.
Synchronous motors are the best choice if it is important to have low envelope dimensions,
low rotor moment of inertia and therefore maximum dynamic response ("Servo" control
type).
Asynchronous motors can be used to increase maximum speeds in the field-weakening
range. Asynchronous motors for higher power ratings are also available.
Synchronous-reluctance motors in the medium power range can represent a good alternative
configuration to induction motors if higher power ratings with high efficiencies are required.
The following factors are especially important when engineering a drive application:
• The ambient temperatures and the installation altitude of the motors and drive components.
• Heat dissipation from the motors through forced ventilation or water cooling
The motor-specific limiting characteristics provide the basis for defining the motors.
These define the torque or power characteristic versus the speed and take into account the
motor limits based on the DC-link voltage of the Power Module or Motor Module. The DC-link
voltage is in turn dependent on the supply voltage and, in the case of torque drives, on the
type of Line Module.
Other constraints apply when integrating the drives into an automation environment such as
SINUMERIK or SIMOTION.
The motor is selected based on the load which is specified by the application. Different
characteristic curves must be used for different load events.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 207
Configuration
6.2 Procedure when engineering

The following operating scenarios have been defined:

• Duty cycle with constant ON period.
• Duty cycles with varying ON period.
• Free duty cycle.
The objective is to identify characteristic torque and speed operating points that can be used
as a basis for selecting the motor depending on the load.

6.2.2 Specifying the duty cycle

Duty cycles with constant ON period

For duty cycles with constant ON period, there are specific requirements for the torque
characteristic curve as a function of the speed, for example:
M = constant, M ~ n2, M ~ n or P = constant.

Figure 6-1 S1 duty (continuous operation)

These drives typically operate at a specific operating point. Drives such as these are
dimensioned for a base load. The base load torque must lie below the S1 characteristic
curve. An overload rating is provided for transient overloads (e.g. during acceleration). The
overload current must be calculated relative to the required overload torque. The peak torque
must lie below the voltage limiting characteristic.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

208 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Configuration
6.2 Procedure when engineering

Duty cycles with varying ON period

As well as continuous duty (S1), standard intermittent duty types (S6) are also defined for duty
cycles with varying ON periods. This is a mode of operation consisting of a series of similar
cycles, each one comprising one time period with a constant load and one idle time. There is no
pause.

S6: Continuous operation duty-type

tS Duty cycle comprising a

P
tL tB sequence of identical duty
cycles, each of which consists
of a period of constant load
followed by an interval at no
t load. There are no de- ener-
gized intervals.
Pv
Designation:
t
e.g.: S6 - 40 %, 85 kW.
T max.
T (114 HP).

tB
tr = , t s = 10 min
G_DA65_EN_00068 t tB + tL

Figure 6-2 S6 duty (continuous duty with intermittent load)

Fixed variables (overload factors) are usually applied for the relative ON period:
• S6 – 60%
• S6 – 40%
• S6 – 25%
The overload factors for the corresponding intermittent duty types (S6) referred to the S1
characteristic (continuous duty) can be found in Chapter "Technical data and characteristics."
For induction motors, in addition to the S1 characteristic, the S6 characteristics are also
shown.
see Chapter "Technical data and characteristics" (Page 221)

Note
S3 duty
The overload factors for continuous duty with intermittent load (S6) can also be applied for the
S3 intermittent duty types (S3-60%, S3-40% or S3-25%) for 1PH8 motors with forced ventilation
or water cooling.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 209
Configuration
6.2 Procedure when engineering

Free duty cycle

A load duty cycle defines the characteristics of the motor speed and the torque with respect to
time.

Figure 6-3 Example of a duty cycle

A load torque is specified for each time period. In addition to the load torque, the average
load moment of inertia and motor moment of inertia must be taken into account for
acceleration. It may be necessary to take into account a frictional torque that opposes the
direction of motion.
For gearbox mounting:
In determining the load and acceleration torque required by the motor, the gear ratio and
the gear efficiency must be considered. A higher gear ratio increases positioning accuracy
in terms of encoder resolution. For any given motor encoder resolution, as the gear ratio
increases, so does the resolution of the machine position to be detected.

Note
Duty cycles in the field-weakening range
For duty cycles in the field-weakening range, the drive system must be engineered using the TST
engineering tool.

Permissible motor torque

Once the application has been defined and specified, the maximum motor torque is calculated.
Generally, the maximum motor torque is required when accelerating. The load torque and the
torque required to accelerate the motor are added.
The maximum motor torque is then verified with the limiting characteristic curves of the
motors.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

210 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Configuration
6.2 Procedure when engineering

The following criteria must be taken into account when selecting the motor:
• The dynamic limits must be adhered to, i.e. all speed-torque points of the relevant load event
must lie below the relevant limiting characteristic curve.
• The thermal limits must be adhered to, i.e. the rms motor torque at the average motor speed
resulting from the duty cycle must lie below the S1 characteristic curve (continuous duty).
The rms value of the motor current within a duty cycle must be less than the rated motor
current.
• In the field-weakening range, the permissible motor torque is restricted by the voltage limit
characteristic (stability limit).
Note
Rated pulse frequencies
The rated motor data is valid only for 4 kHz (booksize or blocksize Motor Modules) or 2 kHz
(chassis motor module). Operation of the motors with rated pulse frequencies < 2 kHz is not
permitted!

6.2.3 Selecting induction motors

Characteristic curves for asynchronous motors

Speed-power diagrams P = f(n) and speed-torque diagrams M = f(n) for operation with the
SINAMICS converter system are described in the motor characteristics, see Chapter "Technical
data and characteristics" (Page 221).
Depending on the motor variant, the S1 characteristic (continuous operation) is available
from standstill to rated point with maximum possible thermal torque, or passes through
the constant-torque range. The power increases in proportion to speed depending on the
available torque.
This is then followed by a constant-power range where the field is weakened (field-
weakening range). The field-weakening range is limited by the voltage limit.
For induction motors, in addition to the S1 characteristic, the S6 characteristics are also
shown, see Chapter "Technical data and characteristics" (Page 221).

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 211
Configuration
6.2 Procedure when engineering

0RWRUSRZHU
3

&RQVWDQW
PRPHQW
UDQJH 9ROWDJHOLPLW
3PD[

6
3UDWHG

&RQVWDQW
SRZHUUDQJH
ILHOGZHDNHQLQJRSHUDWLRQ
Q
QUDWHG Q QPD[
6SHHG

Figure 6-4 Typical speed/power diagram for 1PH8 asynchronous motors

In order that safe, reliable operation is guaranteed even when the line supply voltage
fluctuates and the motor parameters vary, a safety margin of at least 10% should always
be maintained to the voltage limit at every operating point depending on the type of supply
voltage of the Motor Module (inverter) and Infeed Module.

Note
For the configuring of main spindle applications for machine tools, the characteristics for the
supply voltage "ALM 400 V" include up to two additional ancillary rated points with which
extended field-weakening operation can be configured. In this case, the range of constant power
starts at the ancillary rated point and ends at the associated point n2. The rest of the
characteristic is the same as the S1 characteristic in the diagram.

Asynchronous motors have a high overload capacity in the constant power range. The
theoretical curve of the maximum permissible overload capacity is shown as a limit in the
characteristic diagrams and corresponds to value Pmax.

6.2.4 Selecting synchronous motors

Characteristic curves for synchronous motors

The S1 characteristic (continuous operation) up to rated point for synchronous motors is similar
to the S1 characteristic for asynchronous motors. The S1 characteristic represents the thermally
maximum possible continuous torque that can be produced. The S1 power increases with the
speed depending on the available torque up to approximately the rated speed.
This is followed by an area with reduced power characterized by increasing iron and friction
losses, as well as the increase of negative field voltage with increasing speed due to the
constant field of the synchronous rotor.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

212 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Configuration
6.2 Procedure when engineering

0RWRUSRZHU
3

3PD[

6
31

 Q1 QPD[,QY QPD[ Q

6SHHG

Figure 6-5 Typical speed/power diagram for 1PH8 three-phase synchronous motors

Note
Like those for induction motors, the data sheets for the supply voltage "ALM 400V" include
additional ancillary rated points for the configuring of main spindle applications for machine
tools. These allow an extended speed range to be configured.

The theoretical curve of the maximum permissible overload capacity is shown as a limit in
the characteristic diagrams and corresponds to value Pmax.

Note
Voltage limitation
A SINAMICS Voltage Protection Module (VPM) is required for operation at speeds of nmax,Inv and
above. Voltage Protection Modules are available for rated currents up to 200 A.
For further information, please refer to the SINAMICS S120 configuration manuals.

6.2.5 Selecting synchronous-reluctance motors

Characteristics for synchronous-reluctance motors

For synchronous-reluctance motors, the S1 characteristic (uninterrupted duty) has a response
similar to that for synchronous motors. The S1 characteristic represents the thermally maximum
possible continuous torque that can be produced.
As a result of the very low rotor losses, in the medium speed range, synchronous-reluctance
motors have a higher thermal utilization and when compared to induction motors, have a
better efficiency class. When configuring, one of two versions can be selected:
• Efficiency (IE3 to IE5)
• Performance (IE2 to IE4)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 213
Configuration
6.3 Different rated points for induction motors

As a result of the rotor design, a synchronous-reluctance motor has a restricted field-

weakening range, and when compared to an induction motor, has a lower maximum
mechanical speed.

Pmax
P

S1
PN

nN n2 n

Figure 6-6 Typical speed-power diagram for 1PH8 synchronous-reluctance motors

Note
When configuring the system, the poorer power factor when compared to induction motors
must be taken into account. This results in a higher reactive and/or apparent power at the motor
terminals, and as a consequence, the converter must be able to provide a somewhat higher
current.

6.3 Different rated points for induction motors

All 1PH8 induction motors can be configured based on a total of 4 characteristics and therefore
also 4 rated operating points. The rated points are also stamped on the motor nameplate.
For correct configuration, the line voltage and the line infeed are relevant for choosing the
characteristics and rated points.

Table 6-2 Definition of the characteristics and rated points:

Characteristics or‐ Converter sys‐ Line voltage Supply infeed Remarks

der tem
1 SINAMICS 3 AC 400 V Smart/Basic Line Module (SLM/ Infeed with uncontrolled Smart/Basic-
BLM) Mode (converter output voltages up to
380 V)
2 SINAMICS 3 AC 400 V Active Line Module (ALM) Infeed with controlled active mode
(converter output voltages up to 425 V)
3 SINAMICS 3 AC 480 V Smart/Basic Line Module (SLM/ Infeed with uncontrolled Smart/Basic-
BLM) Mode (converter output voltages up to
460 V)
4 SINAMICS 3 AC 480 V Active Line Module (ALM) Infeed with controlled Active Mode
(converter output voltages up to 500 V)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

214 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Configuration
6.3 Different rated points for induction motors

Note
For water-cooled induction motors with shaft heights 180, 225 and 280, the characteristic order
"4" is not shown. As a consequence, these motors do not have a fourth rated operating point for
"ALM 480 V" on the motor rating plate. When configuring the "ALM 480 V" line infeed, use the
data of the characteristic order "3".

Within the characteristic for SINAMICS, 3 AC 400 V, ALM (2nd order, see table), 2 (sometimes
also 3) different rated speeds are listed. The rated speeds that are additional to the first rated
speed stated are termed ancillary rated points and enable configuration for extended field
weakening operation. This type of configuration is often used for main-spindle applications

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 215
Configuration
6.3 Different rated points for induction motors

on machine tools. It is especially important when migrating from old products, such as 1PH4,
1PH7, 1PM4/6 and 1PL6.

Table 6-3 SINAMICS, 3 AC 400 V, Active Line Module, (ALM), 1PH8135-☐☐G2☐

nrated Prated Mrated Irated nmax1 nmax2 nmax3 nmax, Br n2 Mmax Imax M0 I0
r/min W Nm A r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min Nm A Nm A
2300 31.0 129 61 8000 10,000 15,000 4500 4500 320 148 170 73
2000 1) 29.0 138 64 5250
1500 1) 23.1 147 63 7300



 Pmax




Spannungsgrenzkennlinie

3>N:@

voltage limiting characteristics

PS1


 PSH1
PSH2
 nmax3
 nmax1
nmax,Br nmax2

               
Q>USP@

Mmax






0>1P@

M S1
 Spannungsgrenzkennlinie
voltage limiting characteristics



nmax1
 nmax2
nmax,Br nmax3

               
Q>USP@

1) Ancillary rated point that permits configuration for extended field-weakening operation
(e.g. main-spindle application for machine tools). In this case, the range of constant power
starts at the ancillary rated point and ends at the associated point n2. The rest of the
characteristic is the same as the S1 characteristic in the diagram.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

216 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Configuration
6.4 Configuration for SINAMICS G

The ancillary rated points have the following advantages for configuration:
• Direct comparability of the power and torque at a rated speed with the old products such as
1PH4, 1PH7, 1PM4/6, and 1PL6. (For the old products, lower rated speeds than for 1PH8 are
usually specified.)
• Configuration for an extended field-weakening operation.

Note
For the motor data for SINAMICS, only the rated point is stored. The ancillary rated points cannot
be entered; they are only required for better configuration.

Example of migration from 1PH7 to 1PH8:

Motor 1PH7226-__F Rated operating point for SINAMICS, 3 AC 400 V, ALM 130 kW, 1500 r/min, 828 Nm
Motor 1PH8226-1_F Rated operating point for SINAMICS, 3 AC 400 V, ALM 135 kW, 1750 r/min, 737 Nm
Auxiliary rated operating point for SINAMICS, 3 AC 400 V, 130 kW, 1500 r/min, 828 Nm (comparable
ALM to 1PH7226-__F)

6.4 Configuration for SINAMICS G

Configuration conditions for 1PH8 induction motors

The 1PH8 induction motors can also be configured for operation on SINAMICS G120, G130, and
G150 if certain configuration conditions are met:
• SINAMICS G120 with Power Module PM240-4 (Blocksize) and Control Unit CU240E-2 with
firmware release ≥ 4.5 or CU250, vector control (encoderless)
• SINAMICS G130/G150 and Control Unit CU320-2 with firmware version ≥ 4.5, vector control
(encoderless or with incremental encoder HTL)
• System restrictions:
• 1PH8 SH 80 to SH 160 Pulse frequency ≥ 4 kHz
• 1PH8 SH 180 to SH 280 Pulse frequency ≥ 2 kHz
• Maximum permissible output frequency for PM240-2: 240 Hz (means n_max = 7000 r/min)
• System classification - characteristics:
Only the characteristics of 1PH8 can be used for the non-regulated infeed.

Characteris‐ Converter sys‐ Line voltage Supply infeed Remarks

tics order tem
1 SINAMICS 400 V 3 AC Smart/Basic Line Module Infeed with Smart/Basic Mode non-regulated
(SLM/BLM) (converter output voltages up to 380 V)
3 SINAMICS 480 V 3 AC Smart/Basic Line Module Infeed with Smart/Basic Mode non-regulated
(SLM/BLM) (converter output voltages up to 460 V)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 217
Configuration
6.5 Configuration for 1PH808 Premium Performance

Configuration conditions for 1PH8 synchronous-reluctance motors

1PH8 synchronous-reluctance motors can also be configured for operation on SINAMICS G120,
G130 and G150 if certain configuration conditions are met:
• Power Module PM240-4 (Blocksize)
• Control Unit CU240E-2 from firmware V4.7 SP13 HF2
The system classification was shown using specific characteristics, see Chapter "Technical
data and characteristics" (Page 221).

6.5 Configuration for 1PH808 Premium Performance

1PH8 motors in the "Premium Performance" variant have been developed specially for spindle
drives for "drilling & tapping centers" and are characterized by higher performance data, such as:
• High maximum speeds (24,000 r/min)
• Low intrinsic moment of inertia
• High overload capability

Due to the higher performance data, 1PH8 motors have been harmonized to operate with
the SINAMICS S120 Motor Module Booksize, Booksize Combi and the new Booksize Combi
Module to facilitate a better configuration.
In the characteristics in Chapter "Technical data and characteristics", in addition to the
rated operating point and the necessary pulse frequency, the maximum torques, maximum
currents and maximum powers permissible for the specific Motor Module are specified.
In this way, different overload requirements can be simply configured. Typical intermittent
duties S6-10%, S6-25% and S6-40% for "Drilling & Tapping Center" are also specified in the
characteristics.

Table 6-4 Explanation of the symbols in the characteristic curves

Abbrevia‐ Unit Description

tion
nN r/min Rated speed
PN kW Rated power
MN Nm Rated torque
IN A Rated current
n2 r/min Maximum operating speed in field-weakening range (limits range of con‐
stant power)
nmax r/min Maximum permissible speed for the "Premium Performance" version
Imax1 A Maximum permissible short-time current at Mmax1 for Motor Module Book‐
size
Imax2 A Maximum permissible short-time current at Mmax2 for Motor Module Book‐
size Combi
Imax3 A Maximum permissible short-time current at Mmax3 for Motor Module Book‐
size Combi (upgrade)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

218 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Configuration
6.5 Configuration for 1PH808 Premium Performance

Mmax1 Nm Maximum permissible short-time torque for Motor Module Booksize

Mmax2 Nm Maximum permissible short-time torque for Motor Module Booksize Combi
Mmax3 Nm Maximum permissible short-time torque for Motor Module Booksize Combi
(upgrade)
Pmax1 Nm Maximum permissible short-time power for Motor Module Booksize
Pmax2 Nm Maximum permissible short-time power for Motor Module Booksize Combi
Pmax3 Nm Maximum permissible short-time power for Motor Module Booksize Combi
(upgrade)
fcycle kHz Rated pulse frequency

Note
Parameters must be adapted when commissioning
Motors with the "Premium Performance" bearing version are presently not plug & play
components. Even after automatically commissioning the motors with DRIVE-CLiQ, the
commissioning engineer must adapt the appropriate parameters.
Example: Motors with V and W winding versions (10th position of the Article No.) require an
8 kHz pulse frequency. Presently, this value is not automatically set. Further, for these motors,
the current controller must be adapted. These parameters are currently not saved in the DRIVE-
CLiQ interface data and must be modified manually by the commissioning engineer. These
motors may only be operated with a fast current controller (p1810.11=yes) when connected to
the SINAMICS S120 drive system.
Request the commissioning specifications from Technical Support to obtain a precise
commissioning procedure (see Chapter "Instructions").

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 219
Configuration
6.5 Configuration for 1PH808 Premium Performance

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

220 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Technical data and characteristics 7
The data sheets and characteristics for the various motor frame sizes are available in SIOS.

Induction motors (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/

109808406)

Synchronous motors (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/

view/109808407)

Reluctance motors (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/

109808408)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 221
Technical data and characteristics

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

222 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Preparing for use 8
Transportation

Note
Transportation conditions
Comply with the local national regulations for the transportation of motors.

Note
Observing the notes
Observe the information on the original packaging and in the operating instructions when
transporting and setting down the motor.

NOTICE
Bearing damage during transport
If the customer has already mounted parts, for example coupling, belt pulley, etc., the bearing
can be damaged during transport.
• In this case, make sure that the customer uses a rotor locking device.

Storage

Note
Storage
If possible, store the motor in its original packaging.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 223
Preparing for use

NOTICE
Frost damage to water-cooled motors
Water-cooled motors can be damaged by frost
• Remove the liquid coolant before storage and blow out the cooling ducts with compressed
air.

Preserve the free shaft ends, sealing elements, and flange surfaces with a protective coating.

NOTICE
Seizure damage to bearings
If the motors are stored incorrectly, bearing seizure damage can occur, e.g. brineling, as a result
of vibration.
• Comply with the storage conditions.

Storage conditions
Please observe the warning instructions on the packaging and labels.
Store the motor in a dry, dust-free, and vibration-free indoor storage facility.
Adhere to the following values:
• vrms < 0.2 mm/s
• Max. temperatures: -15 °C to 55 °C
• Mean relative humidity < 60 %

Note
Replacing roller bearings
• Even if the motor was stored for more than two years under favorable conditions (i.e. in a dry,
dust-free room that is not susceptible to vibration), you must replace the bearings.
• If the motor was stored under unfavorable conditions, you must replace the bearings after
approx. 18 months.

Note
Observing the notes
Observe the information in the operating instructions when storing the motor.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

224 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Electrical connection 9
9.1 Permissible line system configurations
In combination with the drive system, the motors are generally approved for operation on TN
and TT systems with grounded neutral and on IT systems.
In operation on IT systems, the occurrence of a first fault between an active part and
ground must be signaled by a monitoring device. In accordance with IEC 60364-4-41 it is
recommended that the first fault should be eliminated as quickly as practically possible.
In systems with a grounded external conductor, an isolating transformer with grounded
neutral (secondary side) must be connected between the line supply and the drive system
to protect the motor insulation from excessive stress. The majority of TT systems have a
grounded external conductor, so in this case an isolating transformer must be used.

9.2 Circuit diagram of the motor

You will find information on the circuit and on connecting the motor winding and the auxiliary
equipment (e. g. temperature sensor, anti-condensation heating, etc.) in the circuit diagram.
The circuit diagram is in the terminal box for the cable connection.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 225
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

9.3 System integration

9.3.1 SINAMICS drive I/O

'5,9(&/L4

)URPOHIWWRULJKW

&RQWURO8QLW
7HUPLQDO0RGXOHV 6PDUW/LQHRGHU$FWLYH/LQH0RGXOH
'RXEOH0RWRU0RGXOH
6LQJOH0RWRU0RGXOH
2SWLRQ%RDUGV

6HQVRU
0RGXOH
0RWRUVZLWK

*B30B(1BD
'5,9(&/L4
LQWHUIDFH
0RWRUVZLWKRXW
'5,9(&/L4
027,21&211(&7SRZHUFDEOH
LQWHUIDFH
027,21&211(&7VLJQDOFDEOH
'5,9(&/L4
'5,9(&/L4027,21&211(&7

Figure 9-1 SINAMICS S120 system overview

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

226 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

9.3.2 Connecting-up information

Comply with the rating plate data (type plate) and circuit diagram in the terminal box. Use
sufficiently dimensioned connection cables.

Note
System compatibility for connection
System compatibility is only guaranteed if shielded power cables are used and the shield is
electrically connected through a large surface area to the metal motor terminal box (using metal
EMC cable glands) or using a power connector.
Incorporate the shields in the protective grounding concept. Connect open-circuit conductors,
conductors that are not used or electrical cables that can be touched to protective ground. If the
brake feeder cables in the SIEMENS cable accessories are not used, then connect the brake
conductor cores and shields to the cabinet ground. Open-circuit cables result in capacitive
charges.
Use EMC cable glands for fixed cable entries. The cable glands are screwed into the threaded
holes of the terminal box.
Close and seal any unused threads using a metal screw plug.

Note
Connection with aluminum conductors
Aluminum conductors can also be used for motors with higher powers and currents (e.g. shaft
height 280). If you are using aluminum conductors, comply with the following additional
points:
• Use only cable lugs that are suitable for connecting aluminum conductors.
• Immediately before inserting the aluminum conductor, remove the oxide layer from the
contact areas on the conductor and/or the mating piece, by brushing or filing.
• Then grease the contact areas immediately using neutral Vaseline in order to avoid re-
oxidation.

Note
Terminal boxes with aluminum connecting bars
For terminal boxes with aluminum connecting bars (type 1XB7), copper (Cu) cables with copper
(Cu) cable lugs can also be connected.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 227
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Internal equipotential bonding

The potential equalization between the grounding terminal in the terminal box enclosure and
the motor enclosure is established via the terminal box fixing screws. The contact locations
underneath the screw/bolt heads are bare and are protected against corrosion.
The standard terminal box cover fixing screws provide adequate equipotential bonding
between the terminal box cover and terminal box enclosure.

Note
Higher number of grounding terminals in the terminal box for shaft height 280 (option
Q00)
For large transmission powers, symmetrical power cables with a grounding conductor split into
3 are used in some cases. To be able to connect this high number of grounding conductors in the
terminal box, with option Q00, for a shaft height 280, a grounding bar with a higher number of
terminals can also be mounted, see Chapter "Increased number of grounding terminals in the
terminal box (Page 202)".

Shaft height Terminal box Quantity Quantity

Connecting terminals Terminals (grounding)
(Grounding) Option Q00
SH Type Standard
280 1XB7712-P... 4 x M16 12 x M6

Motor and connecting cables

• For the motor cables, use twisted or three-core cables with additional ground conductor.
Strip the insulation from the ends of the conductors so that the remaining insulation extends
up to the cable lug or terminal.
• Arrange the connecting cables loosely in the terminal box so that the protective conductor
has excess length and the insulation of the cable cores cannot be damaged. Ensure that the
connecting cables are strain relieved.
• Take special care that the required air clearances are actually maintained:
– Up to shaft height 160, as a minimum 4.5 mm
– From shaft height 180, as a minimum 10 mm

Checking/testing after connecting up

• The inside of the terminal box must be clean and free of any cable pieces.
• All of the terminal screws must be tight.
• The minimum air clearances must be strictly maintained.
• The cable entries must be reliably sealed.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

228 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

• Unused cable entries must be closed and the screw plugs must be screwed tight.
• All the sealing surfaces must be in a perfect condition.

Connecting the ground conductor

The ground conductor cross-section must be in full conformance with the installation
regulations, e.g. acc. to IEC/EN 60204-1.
For shaft height 225 and shaft height 280, also connect the grounding conductor to the
motor end shield. There is a clamping lug ① for the ground conductor at the designated
connection point. This is suitable for connecting multi-conductor cables with cable lugs or
ribbon cables with the appropriate conductor terminations.

཰
Figure 9-2 Terminal lug for grounding conductor (shaft heights 225 and 280)

When connecting up, ensure that

• the connecting surface is bare and is protected against corrosion using a suitable substance,
e.g. acid-free Vaseline
• the flat and spring washers are located under the screw head
• the minimum necessary screw-in depth and the tightening torque for the clamping screw
must be maintained

Table 9-1 Screw-in depth and tightening torque

Screw Penetration depth: Tightening torque

M8 x 30 > 8 mm 20 Nm

9.3.3 Routing cables in a damp environment

Note
Routing cables in humid/moist environments
If the motor is mounted in a humid environment, the power and signal cables must be routed
as shown in the following figure.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 229
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

6,(0(16

6,(0(16
6,(0(16

6,(0(16
6,(0(16
6,(0(16

ULFKWLJ SHUPLWWHG QLFKWHUODXEW QRWSHUPLWWHG

Figure 9-3 Principle of cable routing in a wet/moist environment

9.3.4 Power connection

WARNING
Thermally damaged connecting cables
If connection cables have a conductor cross section that is too small for the application, the
connection cables can be thermally damaged. This can result in personal injury and damage to
property due to electric shock and fire hazard.
• Carefully observe the current which the motor draws for your particular application!
Adequately dimension the connecting cables according to IEC 60204-1 or IEC 60364-5-52.

0RWRU (QGVOHHYHVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK',1

8 /

9 /

: /

Figure 9-4 Power cable

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

230 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Terminal box connection

The type designation of the mounted terminal box as well as the details on the power
connection for the line supply cables can be taken from the following table. A circuit diagram to
connect the motor winding is provided in the terminal box when the motors are shipped.

0RWRU 7HUPLQDOER[ 0RWRU 7HUPLQDOER[

8 9 : 8 9 :
8 9 : 8 9 :

<FRQQHFWLRQ
IRU6+WR ෙ FRQQHFWLRQ
IRU6+DQG RQO\IRU6+DQG
VXSSO\YROWDJH9 VXSSO\YROWDJH99

Figure 9-5 Circuit diagram

Note
Connecting temperature sensors and PTC thermistors
The spare temperature sensor (option A25 for shaft heights 80 to 160, standard from shaft
height 180 and higher) and the PTC thermistor circuit for alarm/trip (option A12) are connected
to a signal terminal block in the terminal box.

Star/delta connection in the terminal box (SH80 to SH160)

The star/delta connection can be implemented using an external contactor circuit or as
permanent setting in the terminal box.

6WDUFRQQHFWLRQ 'HOWDFRQQHFWLRQ
6WDQGDUG

: 8 9 : 8 9

8 9 : 8 9 :

Figure 9-6 Fixed star/delta connection in the terminal box

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 231
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Current-carrying capacity for power and signal cables

The current carrying capacity of PVC/PUR-insulated copper cables is specified for routing types
B1, B2, C and E under continuous operating conditions in the table with reference to an ambient
air temperature of 40 °C. For other ambient temperatures, the values must be corrected by the
factors from the table of derating factors.

Table 9-2 Cable cross section and current-carrying capacity

Cross section Current-carrying capacity rms; AC 50/60 Hz or DC for routing type

mm2 B1 B2 C E
A A A A
Electronics (according to EN 60204-1)
0.20 - 4.3 4.4 4.4
0.50 - 7.5 7.5 7.8
0.75 - 9 9.5 10
Power (according to EN 60204-1)
0.75 8.6 8.5 9.8 10.4
1.00 10.3 10.1 11.7 12.4
1.50 13.5 13.1 15.2 16.1
2.50 18.3 17.4 21 22
4 24 23 28 30
6 31 30 36 37
10 44 40 50 52
16 59 54 66 70
25 77 70 84 88
35 96 86 104 110
50 117 103 125 133
70 149 130 160 171
95 180 165 194 207
120 208 179 225 240
Power (according to IEC 60364-5-52)
150 2391) 2061) 2591) 2761)
185 274 1)
235 1)
296 1)
3151)
> 185 Values must be taken from the standard
1)
Extrapolated values

Table 9-3 Derating factors for power and signal cables

Ambient air temperature Derating factor according to EN 60204-1, Table D1

°C
30 1.15
35 1.08
40 1.00
45 0.91

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

232 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Ambient air temperature Derating factor according to EN 60204-1, Table D1

°C
50 0.82
55 0.71
60 0.58

Assignment, terminal boxes and max. cross-sections

Table 9-4 Terminal box data

Terminal Shaft Cable entry Cable entry Outer cable di‐ Number of main ter‐ Max. cross- Max.
box type height (power) (external sig‐ ameter, max. minals section current
nals) mm 2) per per
terminal terminal
mm2 A 3)
gk803 SH80 1 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 20 Phases: 3 x M5 1 x 10 52
Grounding: 2 x M5
gk806 SH80 1 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 20 Phases: 6 x M5 1 x 10 52
Grounding: 2 x M5
gk813 SH100 1 x M32 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 24.2 Phases: 3 x M5 1 x 16 70
Grounding: 2 x M5
gk823 SH100 1 x M32 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 24.2 Phases: 3 x M5 1 x 16 70
Grounding: 2 x M5
gk826 SH100 1 x M32 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 24.2 Phases: 6 x M5 1 x 10 52
Grounding: 2 x M5
gk833 SH132 1 x M40 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 32 Phases: 3 x M6 1 x 35 110
Grounding: 2 x M6
gk843 SH132 1 x M50 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 38 Phases: 3 x M6 1 x 50 133
Grounding: 2 x M6
gk846 SH132 1 x M50 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 38 Phases: 6 x M6 1 x 25 88
Grounding: 2 x M6
gk863 SH160 1 x M50 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 38 Phases: 3 x M6 1 x 50 133
Grounding: 2 x M6
gk873 SH160 1 x M63 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 42.6 Phases: 3 x M6 1 x 50 133
Grounding: 2 x M6
gk874 SH160 1 x M63 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 1) 42.6 Phases: 3 x M10 2 x 70 240
Grounding: 2 x M6
1XB7322- SH180 2 x M50 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 4) 38 Phases: 3 x M12 2 x 50 210
P05 to Grounding: 4 X M6e
SH280
1XB7422- SH180 2 x M63 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 4) 53 Phases: 3 x M12 2 x 70 270
P06 to Grounding: 4 x M8
SH280

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 233
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Terminal Shaft Cable entry Cable entry Outer cable di‐ Number of main ter‐ Max. cross- Max.
box type height (power) (external sig‐ ameter, max. minals section current
nals) mm 2) per per
terminal terminal
mm2 A 3)
1XB7700- SH225 3 x M75 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 4)
68 Phases: 3 x 2 x M12 3 x 150 700
P02 and Grounding: 3 x
SH280 clamping plate
1XB7712- SH225 4 x M75 x 1.5 1 x M16 x 1.5 4) 68 Phases: 3 x 4 x M16 4 x 185 1150
P03 and Grounding: 4 x M16
SH280
1)
M16 x 1.5 thread arranged at 90° angle to signal connection; thread only with options A12, A25 and encoder version A
(without encoder)
2)
Depending on the version of metric cable gland (based on the MOTION-CONNECT cable type and cable glands from HUGRO
or from AGRO)
3)
Current-carrying capacity based on EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-52, routing type E
4)
M16 x 1.5 thread arranged opposite to the signal connection (lateral to the cable entry plate); thread only for option A12 and
encoder version A (without encoder)

Note
Terminal box type 1XB7700-P02
For cable entry, 3 cable glands can only be fit in if cable glands from AGRO or HUGRO are used.
Cable glands from Pflitsch or Lapp, for example, are larger and it is not possible to fit 3 of them
into the available space.

Terminal box design

 

:

9
8

① Terminal screw M5
② Grounding screw M5
③ Insulation strips
Figure 9-7 Terminal box gk803, 3-pole (SH 80)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

234 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

  

8 9 
:

8
9 :

① M5 connecting studs
② Grounding screw M5
③ Insulation strips
④ Jumper
Figure 9-8 Terminal box gk806, 6-pole (SH 80) (can be changed over between star and delta)

  

① Terminal screw M5
② Grounding screw M5
③ Insulation strips
Figure 9-9 Terminal box gk813, 3-pole (SH 100)

  

① Terminal screw M5
② Grounding screw M5
③ Insulation strips
Figure 9-10 Terminal box gk823, 3-pole (SH 100)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 235
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

   

① Terminal screw M5
② Grounding screw M5
③ Insulation strips
④ Jumper
Figure 9-11 Terminal box gk826, 6-pole (SH 100) (can be changed over between star and delta)

Note
Star/delta connection
A star/delta connection is implemented using an external contactor circuit or as a fixed
configuration in terminal box gk806 for SH 80 and in terminal box gk826 for SH 100.
Standard configuration: Star connection via jumpers

  

① Terminal screw M6
② M6 grounding screw
③ Insulation strips
Figure 9-12 Terminal box gk833 (SH 132) and gk863 (SH 160), 3-pole

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

236 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

  

① Terminal screw M6
② M6 grounding screw
③ Insulation strips
Figure 9-13 Terminal box gk843 (SH 132) and gk873 (SH 160), 3-pole

  

① Terminal stud M6
② Jumper
③ M6 grounding screw
④ Insulation strips
Figure 9-14 Terminal box gk846 (SH 132) and gk876 (SH 160), 6-pole (can be changed over
between star and delta)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 237
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

  

:
9
8

① Terminal screw M10

② M6 grounding screw
③ Insulation strips
Figure 9-15 Terminal box gk874 (SH 132 and SH 160), 3-pole (only for synchronous motors and
synchronous-reluctance motors)
:
9
8


  


① Connection screw M5 for SH80/100

Connection screw M6 for SH132/160
② Grounding screw M5 for SH80/100
Grounding screw M6 for SH132/160
③ Insulation strips
Figure 9-16 Terminal boxes gk803 (SH 80), gk823 (SH 100), gk843 (SH 132), gk873 (SH 160),
3-pole, cable entry DE (drive end)

Note
Cable exit direction DE
The motor with the cable exit direction DE has a "D" in the 15th position of the Article No.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

238 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Note
The internal motor cables are mounted on the NDE side on the 3-pole terminal board.
Terminal box gk874 is not possible.

① Main terminal
② Ground terminal
③ Signal connection terminal
④ Signal connection
Figure 9-17 1XB7322-P05 terminal box (SH 180 to SH 280)

① Main terminal
② Ground terminal
③ Signal connection terminal
④ Signal connection
Figure 9-18 1XB7422-P06 terminal box (SH 180 to SH 280)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 239
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

① Main terminal
② Ground terminal
③ Signal connection terminal
④ Signal connection
Figure 9-19 1XB7700-P02 terminal box (SH 225 and SH 280)

① Main terminal
② Ground terminal
③ Signal connection terminal
Figure 9-20 1XB7712-P03 terminal box (SH 225 and SH 280)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

240 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Note
Signal connection for special orders
The signal connection may differ from the standard layout in the case of special orders.
For the device version without speed encoder, there is an M16 x 1.5 connection thread.

Power connector connection

• Use connector size 1.5.
• Assign the connector as shown in the "Power connector 1.5" diagram. Connect the protective
conductor.

&RQQHFWRUVL]H
9

8
:

*1<(

Figure 9-21 Power connector, size 1.5 (view of connector pins)

Connector Rotation range Maximum torque

Connector size 1.5 270° 20 Nm

Note
Rotating the connectors
• The permissible rotation range must not be exceeded.
• In order to guarantee the degree of protection, max. 10 revolutions are permissible.
• Connectors should be rotated using the matching mating connector located on the
connector thread. Only rotate the Sensor Module by hand. The use of pipe wrenches,
hammers, or similar is not permitted.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 241
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

• Use connector size 3.

• Assign the connector as shown in the "Power connector 3" diagram. Connect the protective
conductor.

&RQQHFWRUVL]H
9

: 8

*1<(

Figure 9-22 Power connector, size 3 (looking onto the connector pins)

Star/delta connection via an external contactor circuit

When induction motors (SH 80 to SH 160) are used, it is possible to select one of the following
operating modes:
• Star connection
• Delta connection

Circuit to implement star-delta switchover

For induction motors, all six connection leads of the three winding phases are fed out to be able
to select the various operating modes.
The changeover is carried out outside the spindle using switching devices and equipment
that are not included with the motor spindle (i.e. these devices are not included in the scope
of delivery).

Note
Star/delta connection
When changing over the circuit configuration (star-delta), the appropriate data set for the closed-
loop motor control must also be changed-over.
A changeover may only be made when the spindle is in a no-load condition and with the power
module pulses inhibited.

For information about the circuit to implement the star-delta changeover, refer to the
following diagram and SINAMICS S120 Function Manual (FH1).

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

242 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Using the star connection

The star connection offers some advantages at low speeds. The maximum torque in the star
connection is approximately twice as high as in the delta connection. However, due to the higher
reactive power requirement of the star connection, the available torque in the uppermost speed
range is significantly restricted. This means that the star connection should only be activated
when machining which requires a high torque in the lower speed range. An example of such
a machining operation is roughing.

Using the delta connection

Although the delta connection provides, in the lower speed range, a lower maximum torque
than the star connection, the torque remains available up to high speeds. This means that the
delta connection should be activated for all machining operations which are carried out in
the medium and high speed ranges.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 243
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Connection diagram for Y/D changeover

6,1$0,&66 6,180(5,.'
0RWRU0RGXOH 3/&RXWSXWV
&RQWURO8QLW','2[[ 

%L&RVRXUFH
8 9 : 3(
%,S U;; (;< $;< $;=

.

$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFWRU
SRZHUVXSSO\PD[
. [ . 9'&
.K .K

. [ .K
.K

. .
8 9 : 8 9 :
8
. .
9
:

. ˂ . <
<˂

(QDEOHSXOVHV <˂FKDQJHRYHU

IURPWKH1&3/&

Figure 9-23 Connection diagram for Y/D changeover with SINAMICS

1)
Safe operating stop cannot be guaranteed by simply opening K1 and K2. Therefore, for
safety reasons there should be electrical isolation provided by contactor Kx. This contactor
may only be switched-in the no-current condition, i.e. the pulse enable must be withdrawn
40 ms before the contactor is opened (de-energized).
2)
Terminal X3 of the voltage limiting module VPM should be wired to a digital input of the
Control Unit on which the assigned 1PH8 motor spindle is also controlled. For the case that
several VPMs are used, each terminal must be wired to a separate digital input of the
relevant Control Unit.
If an armature short-circuit occurs (terminal X3 has opened), the pulses of the relevant axis
must be inhibited. To achieve this, the digital input used is interconnected to the control bit
OFF2 (pulse inhibit) via p0845 = r0722.XX.
Further information can be found in the SINAMICS S120 Function Manual.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

244 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

9.3.5 External fan

Table 9-5 Connected loads for external fans

Shaft height SH Fan motor: Maximum current consumption Air flow direc‐
A tion

Forced ventila‐ 230 V 1 AC/50 Hz 230 V 1 AC/60 Hz 265 V 1 AC/60 Hz

tion (±10 %) (±10 %) (±10 %)
80 0.33 0.25 0.32 NDE --> DE
0.20 0.16 0.19 DE --> NDE
Forced ventila‐ 3-ph. 400 VAC / 400 V 3 AC/60 Hz 480 V 3 AC/60 Hz
tion 50 Hz (±10 %) (±10 %) (±10 %)
100 0.08 0.07 0.11 NDE --> DE
0.10 0.08 0.11 DE --> NDE
132 0.11 0.13 0.13 NDE --> DE
0.10 0.12 0.12 DE --> NDE
160 0.16 0.21 0.21 NDE --> DE
0.16 0.21 0.21 DE --> NDE
Forced ventila‐ 1-ph. 200 ... 277 VAC / 50 Hz, 60 Hz (±10 %)
tion (EC fan)
Standard
180 1.1 ... 1.3 NDE --> DE
DE --> NDE
225 2.0 ... 2.3 NDE --> DE
DE --> NDE
Forced ventila‐ 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V (-5 %/+10 %)
tion (EC fan) 50 Hz, 60 Hz (±10 %)
Option: L76
180 0.44 ... 0.5 NDE --> DE
DE --> NDE
225 0.75 ... 0.9 NDE --> DE
DE --> NDE
Forced ventila‐ 3 AC 380 V ... 480 V (-5 %/+10 %)
tion (EC fan) 50 Hz, 60 Hz (±10 %)
Standard
280 0.75 ... 0.9 NDE --> DE
DE --> NDE

Note
For EC fans, for shaft height 180 and shaft height 280, as a result of the electronic input circuitry,
the current drawn can briefly reach four times the specified current.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 245
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Recommended connection
Connect the separately driven fan via the terminal box of the separately driven fan or optionally
via a power connector. Implement operation of the fans via the motor circuit breaker. A simple
conductor protection is sufficient for the EC fans.

/
/
$GGLWLRQDOIDQV
/
3(

7KHPRWRUSURWHFWLRQFLUFXLWEUHDNHULV
QRWLQFOXGHGZLWKWKHPRWRU
!
,
8 9 :

)DQV

Figure 9-24 Recommended connection

Note
Single-phase fan connection
If you use a 3-pole circuit breaker for a 1-phase fan connection for shaft height 80, then you must
connect the 3 current paths in series (see the diagram).
If only one current path would be used, many circuit breakers would trip too early because they
often also monitor balanced load or voltage on the 3 line conductors. You must determine
whether this circuit is permissible with electronic motor circuit breakers on a case-by-case basis
from the product data sheets of the specific manufacturer.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

246 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

SROH

Figure 9-25 Single-phase connection

Connection via the terminal box

8 9 : 3(

Figure 9-26 Connecting the separately driven fan terminal box, shaft height 100 up to shaft height
160

Connection via the power connector

/

 





1

*1<(

Figure 9-27 Connection, separately driven fan, shaft height 80

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 247
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Note
For 1PH8 motors, shaft height 80, always switch on the separately driven fan via a power
connector, even if the motor power connection is established via a terminal box.

 



:


9

*1<(

Figure 9-28 Connecting the separately driven fan, shaft height 100 up to shaft height 132

Note
Rotating the connectors
• Do not exceed the permissible rotation range.
• In order to guarantee the degree of protection, max. 10 revolutions are permissible.
• When turning, only use the mating connector that matches the connector thread. Only
rotate Sensor Modules by hand. Do not use any tools such as pipe wrench, hammer or similar
tool.

Connector Rotation range Maximum rotation torque

Connector size 1.0 270° 12 Nm

Note
Scope of delivery
The mating connector is not included in the scope of delivery.
Article number mating connector size 1 (with full thread) 6FX2003-0LU00

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

248 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Note
Prefabricated cables
Order pre-assembled cables with the following Article No.:
6FX☐002-5CG01-☐☐☐0

EC external fan for shaft heights 180 to 280

EC external fans are installed in forced ventilated motors of the 1PH8 series. These are especially
designed fan units for this motor series, with a permanently set operating speed.
EC external fans contain high-efficiency electronically commutated motors with permanent
magnets. They are speed-controlled by an integrated controller.
The EC external fans meet the general requirements of EN 61800-2 for variable-speed
electrical drives and are designed for single-quadrant operation.

9HQWLODWLRQGLUHFWLRQ'(ᇄ1'( 9HQWLODWLRQGLUHFWLRQ1'(ᇄ'(

Figure 9-29 EC separately driven fans with air flow direction DE → NDE and air flow direction NDE →
DE, shaft height 180 and shaft height 225

External fans with filter unit (option G14)

For the version with air flow direction NDE → DE, you can optionally add a filter unit (option
G14). The filter corresponds to DIN EN 779 of filter class G3.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 249
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Figure 9-30 EC separately driven fans with air flow direction NDE → DE and filter unit, shaft height
180 and shaft height 225

Connecting a separately driven fan

Connect the separately driven fan in the separately driven fan terminal box. You can rotate
the separately driven fan; for shaft heights 180 and 225, through 90° and for shaft height
280, through 180°.

Figure 9-31 Separately driven fan terminal box ① (schematic representation shaft height 180)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

250 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

WARNING
Short-circuit due to standing water, shaft height 180 and shaft height 225
If you rotate the separately driven fan through 90°, it is not permissible that the cable outlet
faces upward. Water that accumulates at the cable glands can result in a short circuit.
• Rotate the terminal box cover of the separately driven fan through 180°.

Connection at the terminal box

1
1 M20 cable entry for line power connection
2 M20 cable entry for control (optional)
Figure 9-32 Cover of the terminal box, shaft height 180 and shaft height 225

In the delivery condition, the two cable entries are sealed.

• Cable entry ① is intended for the line supply connection, and is therefore only sealed with
a plug.
• Cable entry ② is intended for the optional control connection and is fitted with a screw plug.

Note
Cable gland
The cable glands are not included in the scope of supply. Select suitable cable glands to connect
the cable. The general connection instructions must be observed. Ensure that there is
permanent leak tightness between the cable gland and the terminal box and cable.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 251
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Wiring diagram

*59,.%'5*50,'%'5
,QWHUQDOFRQQHFWLRQZLWKWKHIDQHOHFWURQLFV

02'%86
$QDORJ,Q

'LJLWDO,Q
PD[$&9$

56
'&2XW

.
$ %
9 *1' ( ' $ ' '   3( 1 /

7HUPLQDOEORFN

([WHUQDOFRQQHFWLRQ

 

N˖


6LJQDO  
9


1 Line voltage (see Chapter "Terminal box connection")
2 Relay output (K1) for alarm
3 MODBUS (RS-485) interface (only accessible for Siemens Service)
4 Factory-inserted jumper between 10 V and E1 for 100 % operating speed
5 Input for speed setting via 0…10 V signal or potentiometer (Ri > 100 kΩ)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

252 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

6 10 V DC power supply (Imax 50 mA)

Note
Terminal block
The terminal block is led out with spring-loaded terminals. A cable cross-section of 0.08 up to
1.5 mm2 can be connected to the terminals. A cable cross-section of 1.5 mm2 is recommended.

Note
Relay output (K1)
An external fault message can be output via the isolated contact of the integrated relay.
During operation, the relay picks up, i.e. connections "11" and "14" are jumpered. If a fault
occurs, the relay drops out (contact load, max. 250 V AC 2 A).

Note
Factory-inserted jumper between 10 V and E1
When delivered, a jumper is inserted between the "10 V" power supply and analog input "E1."
100 % of the speed is achieved during operation in this way.
After the line voltage has been switched on and after a run up time of approx. 20 seconds, the
fan is operated at a constant 100 % speed (rated speed).

Note
Speed control via setting signal
Adjust the cooling depending on the duty cycle and the utilization level of the 1PH8 motor.
Remove the jumper inserted in the factory between "10 V" and "E1". The fan speed can be set in
the range 50 …100 % using a setpoint signal (0…10 V).
Contact Siemens Technical Support for additional information and support.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 253
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Diagram of control via an external setting signal

nM

100 %

90

80

70
nmin = 50 % nmax = 100 %
60
5DWHGVSHHG

50

40

30

20
6HWSRLQWVLJQDO9
3:0
10

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0...10 V
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0...100 % PWM

NOTICE
Removing the factory-mounted jumper
The 1PH8 motor can overheat if the external EC fan is operated at low fan speeds as a result of
the setpoint signal it receives.
• Monitor the motor using the integrated temperature sensors.
• Integrate the temperature monitoring into the interlocking circuit.
If the company operating the plant or system removes the jumper (which was inserted in
the factory), that company becomes responsible for the functional safety of the drive,
especially if the safety instructions are not complied with.

Line connection: Fuse protection

The EC external fans have integrated overload protection, making an external motor
protection device (e.g. motor circuit breaker) unnecessary. A simple conductor protection
is sufficient.
Simple conductor protection with a fuse or MCB:

Fuse MCB Conductor cross section Conductor cross section

VDE UL VDE mm2 *AWG
16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16

(* AWG = American Wire Gauge)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

254 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Residual-current protective device

Only RCDs that are sensitive to universal current (type B or B+) are permissible. Personal
protection is not possible if the device is operated with RCDs, as is also the case for
converters.
When the power supply of the device is switched on, charging current pulses can occur due
to the capacitors. In the integrated EMC filter, this can cause the RCDs to trip instantaneously.
We recommend residual-current operated circuit breakers with a tripping threshold of
300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).

Use in IT systems

WARNING
Risk of electric current
In an IT system, the neutral point of the voltage supply is not grounded. If a short-circuit occurs
between a phase (e.g. "L1") and the protective conductor "PE", then the protective conductor
is at phase potential.
Under no circumstances may a voltage higher than the specified line voltage of the device be
applied between the line connection and the protective conductor "PE".

1-phase EC separately driven fans can be used on an IT line system. On 3-phase IT line
systems, follow the bullet points for use During a ground fault of an unused line phase, the
potential relative to "PE" must not be higher than the specified line voltage of the device (at
neither of the two supply connections).
To ensure fault-free operation on the IT line system, connect the "GND" potential of the
control connections to the protective conductor potential.
The following consequences of this connection must be observed for the control connections
(except for relay contacts):
1. Only connect using cables that are suitable for the line voltage and environment.
2. Only connect via suitable buffer stages.

9.3.6 Signal connection

DRIVE-CLiQ is the preferred method for connecting the encoder systems to SINAMICS.
Motors with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface can be ordered for this purpose. Motors with a
DRIVE-CLiQ interface can be directly connected to the associated motor module via
the available MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables. The MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ
cable is connected to the motor in degree of protection IP67. The DRIVE-CLiQ interface
supplies power to the motor encoder via the integrated 24 VDC supply and transfers the
motor encoder and temperature signals and the electronic type plate data, e.g. a unique

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 255
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

identification number, rating data (voltage, current, torque) to the control unit. The MOTION-
CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cable is used universally for connecting the various encoder types.
These motors simplify commissioning and diagnostics, as the motor and encoder type are
identified automatically.

Encoder connection on motors with DRIVE-CLiQ

Motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces can be directly connected to the corresponding Motor
Module via the available MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables. This data is transferred directly
to the Control Unit.

'5,9(&/L4

0RWRU
0RGXOH 0 ˽
a
3RZHUFDEOH

6,1$0,&66
&RQWUROFDELQHW
0RWRU

Figure 9-33 Encoder connection on motors with DRIVE-CLiQ

Cables on motors with DRIVE-CLiQ

With DRIVE-CLiQ, the same cable is used for all encoder types. Only pre-assembled cables from
Siemens (MOTION-CONNECT) may be used.

Table 9-6 Pre-assembled cable

6FX ☐ 002 - ☐DC☐☐ - ☐☐☐ 0

↓ ↓↓↓
↓ Length
5 MOTION-CON‐ max. cable length 100 m
NECTⓇ500
8 MOTION-CON‐ max. cable length 50 m
NECTⓇ800

For other technical data and length code, refer to Catalog, Chapter "MOTION-CONNECT
connection system"

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

256 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

Encoder connection on motors without DRIVE-CLiQ

If a motor is not equipped with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, the speed encoder and temperature
sensor are connected via a signal connector.
Motors that are not equipped with DRIVE-CLiQ require a Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
(SMC) or a Sensor Module External (SME) when operated with SINAMICS S120. The motor is
connected to the SMC or the SME via the signal cable. The SMC or SME is connected to the
Motor Module via a MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cable.

'5,9(&/L4 6LJQDOFDEOH

0RWRU 6HQVRU0RGXOH&DELQHW 60&

0RGXOH
0 ˽
a
3RZHUFDEOH

6,1$0,&66
&RQWUROFDELQHW
0RWRU

Figure 9-34 Encoder connection on motors without DRIVE-CLiQ

Cables on motors without DRIVE-CLiQ

Prefabricated cables from Siemens (MOTION-CONNECT) must be used. These offer many
advantages over self-assembled cables in terms of operational reliability, quality and availability.
For technical data and length code, see Catalog, Chapter "MOTION-CONNECT connection
system".

Maximum assignment of signal terminal strips in the terminal box

The following signals can be connected to the signal terminal strip:
• Temperature sensor (+1R1; -1R2): For an additional reserve temperature sensor, +1R1 and
-1R2 are connected to the signal terminal strip and (for motors with encoder) also wired to
the signal connector.
• Reserve-temperature sensor (+2R1, -2R2):
– Shaft height 80-160: Option A25
– Shaft height 180-280: Standard
• Additional PTC thermistor circuit for alarm and trip (1TP1, 1TP2, 2TP1, 2TP2): Option A12

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 257
Electrical connection
9.3 System integration

• Pt100 resistance thermometer to monitor rolling bearings (10R1, 10R2, 11R1, 11R2): Shaft
height 180-280: Option A72
• Connection of the anti-condensation heating (1HE1, 1HE2): Shaft height 180-280: Option
K45
1 2

3 3 3 3 )& )&

%& /%& 
7

3 4 5

51 51 51 51 3 3 3 3

)&  
)&
3
3
3
51
51

3
51
51

3

3
3
3















① Bearing thermometers
② Anti-condensation heating
③ Alarm winding PTC thermistor
④ Shutdown winding PTC thermistor
⑤ Pt1000 winding temperature sensor
⑥ Terminal strip
Figure 9-35 Assignment_signal terminal strip_terminal box

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

258 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Dimension drawings 10
10.1 SIEMENS Product Configurator

Description
The SIEMENS Product Configurator supports you when configuring your drive.
You will find the following quickly and easily in the SIEMENS Product Configurator
• Technical data
• Characteristics
• dimension drawings
• 2D/3D CAD data
The SIEMENS Product Configurator supports you when creating system documentation
regarding project-specific information.

Note
The 3D model in the SIEMENS Product Configurator is a simplified representation that does not
show every detail.

You can find further information on the Internet at SIEMENS Product Configurator
(www.siemens.com/SPC):

Recency of dimensional drawings

Note
Changing motor dimensions
Siemens reserves the right to change the dimensions of the motors as part of mechanical design
improvements without prior notice. This means that dimensional drawings can become out of
date.

You can request free of charge current dimension drawings from Technical Support or your
local sales partner.

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 259
Dimension drawings
10.1 SIEMENS Product Configurator

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

260 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
Appendix A
A.1 Description of terms

Rated torque MN
The rated torque is the torque that is mechanically available at the shaft and can be thermally
provided corresponding to the specified operating mode (duty type) according to IEC 60034-1.

Rated speed nN
This is the speed for which the rated power and the rated torque are defined corresponding to
the specified operating mode (duty type) according to IEC 60034-1.

Rated voltage VN
Voltage between two motor phases for which the rating data (PN, nN, etc.) is defined. The rated
voltage definition takes into account magnetic (iron saturation) and thermal factors.

Rated current IN
This is the current (rms phase value) that flows at the rated speed and rated torque and can be
thermally provided according to the specified operating mode (duty type) according to IEC
60034-1.

Rated frequency fN
Frequency required to obtain the performance ratings (PN, nN, etc.).

Rated power PN
The rated power is the power that is mechanically available at the shaft and can be thermally
provided corresponding to the specified operating mode (duty type) according to IEC 60034-1.

Speed for field weakening with constant power n2

Maximum achievable speed at rated power corresponding to the specified operating mode
(duty type) according to IEC 60034-1.

No-load current Iμ
This is the current (rms phase current) that is required in order to operate the motor under no-
load conditions at rated speed without load torque. The no-load current defines the motor
magnetization in the base speed range (low speed at the start of field weakening).

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 261
Appendix
A.1 Description of terms

Maximum speed nmax

The maximum permissible speed nmax is determined by mechanical factors. The maximum speed
nmax must not be exceeded.

NOTICE
Motor damage when the maximum speed is exceeded
The maximum speed nmax is the highest permissible operating speed. The maximum speed nmax
is stamped on the rating plate (nameplate).
The motor can be damaged if operated at inadmissible speeds.
• Ensure that the maximum permissible speed is not exceeded. Realize this using a suitable
control system or activate the speed monitoring function in the drive.

If nS1 < nmax, the motor must not be operated at nmax continuously. Unless a different duty
cycle (duty cycle duration 10 minutes) is specified, the speed must be reduced as stated
below:
t1: 1 min---n1= 0 r/min; t2: 6 min---n2= 2/3 nmax ; t3: 3 min---n3= nmax

Maximum torque Mmax

Torque which is briefly available for dynamic operations (e.g. when accelerating).

Max. current Imax

This is the current (rms phase value) produced at rated speed (nrated) and maximum torque
(Mmax).

S1 duty (continuous operation)

Operation with a constant load, the duration of which is sufficient that the motor goes into a
thermal steady-state condition.

S6 duty (intermittent operation)

Operation which comprises a sequence of identical duty cycles; each of these duty cycles
comprises a time with constant motor load and a no-load time. Unless otherwise specified, the
load period refers to a duty cycle of 10 min.
for example,

S6-40 % = 4 min load operation, 6 min no-load operation

S6-60 % = 6 min load operation, 4 min no-load operation

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

262 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
 Appendix
A.2 Environmental compatibility

Thermal time constant Tth

The thermal time constant defines the temperature rise of the motor winding when the motor
load is suddenly increased (step increase) up to the permissible S1 torque. The motor has
reached 63% of its S1 final temperature after Tth.

A.2 Environmental compatibility

Environmental compatibility
• Environmental aspects during development
When selecting supplier parts, environmental compatibility was an essential criteria.
Special emphasis was placed on reducing the envelope dimensions, weight and variety of
metal and plastic parts.
Effects that impair paint-wetting can be excluded (PWIS test)
• Environmental aspects during production
Supplier parts and the products are predominantly transported in re-usable packing.
Hazardous materials do not have to be transported.
The packing materials themselves essentially comprises paperboard that is in compliance
with the Packaging Directive 94/62/EC.
Energy consumption during production was optimized.
Production has low emission levels.
• Environmental aspects for disposal
Motors must be disposed of carefully taking into account domestic and local regulations in
the normal recycling process or by returning to the manufacturer.
The following must be taken into account when disposing of the motor:
Oil according to the regulations for disposing of old oil (e.g. gearbox oil when a gearbox is
mounted)
Not mixed with solvents, cold cleaning agents or remains of paint
Components that are to be recycled should be separated into:
– Electronics scrap (e.g. encoder electronics, sensor modules)
– Scrap iron
– Aluminum
– Non-ferrous metal (worm gears, motor windings)

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB 263
Appendix
A.2 Environmental compatibility

1PH8 SIMOTICS M main motors

264 Configuration Manual, 09/2024, A5E51895839B AB
More information
SIMOTICS:
www.siemens.com/simotics
Industry Mall:
www.siemens.com/industrymall
Industry Online Support
www.siemens.com/online-support